The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutCOMA2025-000163 ECEIVED: 2/4/2025 l[ JL 202C _ 25-000163 "COOK CHILDRENS" DATE OF ISSUANCE' J GRAPE1 j)E 1625 LANCASTER DRIVE #120 ,; , + , CREATING #120 PERMIT #: 25-000163 r BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION ELECTRONIC REVIEW � C/O 25-000323 (PLEASE PRINT LEGIBLY - COMPLETE ENTIRE FORM) JOB ADDRESS: I �- % l�id�t r'cr- t�< SUITE # LOT: BLOCK: SUBDIVISION: BUILDING CONTRACTOR (company name): i �L c AL� Z'�' SIG' •� C a r?-, r..(, 11 :11-1 . -Tn 6. CURRENT MAILING ADDRESS:' C�dfx�r i4i t1i_ (' CITY/STATE/ZIP: PROPERTY OWNER: U1("1 Lam, �Iu %,� Cr CURRENT MAILING ADDRESS: CITY/STATE/ZIP: , t ,''► C . �` PK PROJECT VALUE: $ { CiC.) PH: # -t )7 -q0 -,5171- Fax # PHONE NUMBER: it, V7 FIRE SPRINKLERED? YES NO WHAT TRADES WILL BE NEEDED? (Check ones that apply) ELECTRIC PLUMBING MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE DONE: -T/1 tGf 1 C - k�-e-A C -%CI -r r CREATING #120 FROM EXISTING ! 11,502 SF SHELL BUILDING USE OF BUILDING OR STRUCTURE: �' ' `� (-- 1 t '' ' NAME OF BUSINESS: COOK CHILDREN'S PHYSICIAN NETWORK Total Square Footage under roof: Square Footage of alteration/addition: 611 Y J I hereby certify that plans have been reviewed and the building will be inspected by a certified energy code inspector in accordance with State Law. Plan review and inspection documentation shall be made available to the Building Department (required for new buildings, alterations and additions) U I hereby certify that plans have been Submitted to the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation for Accessibility Review. Control Number: l `C� �`1 Z (Not required for 1 & 2 family dwellings) 0 I hereby certify that an asbestos survey has been conducted for this structure in accordance with the regulatory requirements of the Texas Department of Health. (REQUIRED FOR DEMOLITIONS, ADDITIONS AND OR ALTERATION TO COMMERCIAL AND PUBLIC BUILDINGS) Ln I hereby certify that the foregoing is correct to the best of my knowledge and all work will be performed according to the documents approved by N 0 the Building Department and in compliance with the City Of Grapevine Ordinance regulating construction. It is understood that the issuance of this permit does not grant or authorize any violation of any code or ordinance of the City Of Grapevine. I FURTHERMORE UNDERSTAND L` THAT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT REVIEWED FOR HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY BY THE CITY, AND THAT THE N DESIGN PROFESSIONAL/OWNER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING SUCH APPROVAL FROM THE APPROPRIATE STATE AND OR FEDERAL AGENCY(S). ` m1 PRINT NAME: ! V .ter, SIGNATURE w PHONE #: 1 i 7 2�v EMAIL: Z) J gCHECK BOX IF PREFERRED TO BE CONTACTED BY E-MAEL m THE FOLLOWING IS TO BE COMPLETED BY THE BUILDING INSPECTION DEPARTMENT Construction Type: Approval (/� Permit Valuation: $ � Setbacks A � royal to Issue p Occupancy Group: 8 Fire Sprinkler: YES NO l Front: Electrical w Division: Building Depth: Left: Plumbing F- Zoning: ?0 Building Width: Rear. _ Mechanical 0 Occupancy Load: Grease Trap Right: Hood Plan Review Approval: Date: y •,-2S Building Permit Fee: _ 6744.50 Z Site Plan Approval: Date: Plan Review Fee: 4,383.93/ w Fire Department: Date: Lot Drainage Fee: % Public Works Department: Date: Sewer Availability Rate:rr / Health Department: Date: Water Availability Rate: w Approved for Permit: Date: Total Fees: 11,128.43 p Lot Drainage Submitted: Approved: Total Amount Due: 6,744.50 w PLAN REVIEW INVOICED 1/2 .2025 cc LL P.O. BOX 95104. GRAPEVINE- TX 78M(817) 410-3165 O:FORA16 y,:;,-,"IRAPPLICATIONSlM24t&.11A1.SM.1107.11109.U11,9J19 City of Grapevine Building - Commercial el*,_� _ PO Box 95104 Alteration Grapevine, Texas 76099 T B b 8 817) 410-3166 Project # 25-000163 Project Description: Interior Renovation (Creating #120 from Existing 11,502 sf Shell Building, Leaving 4,846 sf) for New Medical Clinic [C/O 25-000323] [ELECTRONIC REVIEW] Issued on: 07/25/2025 at 10:09 AM ADDRESS INSPECTIONS 5 1625 Lancaster Dr., 120 Grapevine, TX 76051 1. Building Framing 4. Landscaping 2. Building Energy Code 5. Building Final LEGAL 3. Final Fire Dept Inspection Clearview Park Addition Blk 3 Lot 5 INFORMATION FIELDS PERMIT HOLDER —APPLICANT NAME (Individual) Casey Van Sant Casey Van Sant —APPLICANT PHONE NUMBER 817-266-0790 Hutcherson Construction, Inc. APPLICANT E-MAIL (817) 467-5422 ""NAME OF BUSINESS Cook Children's Physician Network VALUATION 998400 COLLABORATORS • Casey Van Sant Square Footage 6656 Hutcherson What is use of Building/Structure? Medical Clinic Construction, Inc. * CONSTRUCTION TYPE VB (817)467-5422 * OCCUPANCY GROUP B • Reid Hutcherson APPLICATION. pdf, MECH Reid Hutcherson DOCUMENTS - MISC 01 COMcheck.pdf, LIGHTING (817) 467-5422 COMcheck.pdf DOCUMENTS - MISC 02 CONSTRUCTION PLANS.pdf OWNERS • Evergreen -Fern Ltd ` OCCUPANCY LOAD 82 ZONING DISTRICT PO TENANTS APPROVED TO ISSUE ELECTRIC YES • Spencer Seals Cook Children's APPROVED TO ISSUE MECHANICAL YES Physician Network APPROVED TO ISSUE PLUMBING YES (682) 885-4000 Fire Sprinkler System? NO FEE TOTAL PAID DUE 'Building Permit Fee (Value) $ 6,744.50 $ 6,744.50 $ 6,744.50 Building Permit, Plan Review $ 4,383.93 $ 4,383.93 $ 4,383.93 Page 1/3 MYGOV.US 25-000163, 07/25/2025 at 10:09 AM Issued by: Courtney Cogburn FEE TOTAL PAID DUE TOTALS $ 11,128.43 $ 11,128.43 $ 0.00 READ AND SIGN I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE FOREGOING IS CORRECT TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE AND ALL WORK WILL BE PERFORMED ACCORDING TO THE DOCUMENTS APPROVED BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT AND IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE CITY OF GRAPEVINE ORDINANCE REGULATING CONSTRUCTION. IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT THE ISSUANCE OF THIS PERMIT DOES NOT GRANT OR AUTHORIZE ANY VIOLATION OF ANY CODE OR ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF GRAPEVINE. I FURTHERMORE UNDERSTAND THAT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT REVIEWED FOR HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY BY THE CITY AND THAT THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL / OWNER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING SUCH APPROVAL FROM THE APPROPRIATE STATE AND OR FEDERAL AGENCY(S). July 25, 2025 Signature Date City of Grapevine Building - Commercial Alteration = G Project # 25-000163 i r 9 , , I NOTICES 1) ALL work must be done in compliance with the 2021 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. "'ALL work ISSUED prior to January 1, 2024, must be done in compliance with the 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. 2) City Approved Stamped Plans must be on -site for ALL INSPECTIONS. 3) Project address must be clearly posted at the job site. NOTES > 24 HOUR INSPECTION NUMBER METRO (817) 410-3010, CUT OFF TIME FOR A.M. INSPECTION IS 7:30 A.M. --- CUT OFF TIME FOR P.M. INSPECTION IS 12:30 P.M. > PERMIT ISSUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICATION ON FILE IN THIS OFFICE. THIS PERMIT SHALL EXPIRE IF WORK IS NOT COMMENCED WITHIN (180 DAYS) OF ISSUANCE OR IF WORK IS SUSPENDED OR ABANDONED FOR A PERIOD OF (180 DAYS). THE ISSUANCE OR GRANTING OF THIS PERMIT AND / OR APPROVAL OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND COMPUTATIONS SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED TO BE A PERMIT FOR, OR AN APPROVAL OF, ANY VIOLATION OF ANY OF THE PROVISIONS OF THE CODES AND ORDINANCES OF THE CITY OF Page 2/3 MYGOV.US 25-000163, 07/25/2025 at 10:09 AM Issued by: Courtney Cogburn W S T A T E H W Y 1 1 4 I R A E . W D S A V E PROJECT SITE B A Y L O R P K W Y LANCASTER DR W H U D G I N S S T LOCATION MAP TRUE NORTH IT/ELEC BREAKROOM MA STATION WAITING LAB RECEPTION SHARED OFFICE RISER ROOM N.I.C. N.I.C. FOR INFORMATION ONLY 1. PROVIDE SEPARATE LINE ITEM FOR EXTERIOR DOORS 101 AND 133, RE: DOOR SCHEDULE ON A511. 2. PROVIDE SEPARATE LINE ITEM FOR EXTENDED SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCTS TO NOT IN CONTRACT SPACES FOR FUTURE TENANT, RE: MECH 3. PROVIDE SS01 IN LIEU OF PL134, TYP. RE: FINISH LEGEND SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com ARCHITECT OWNER MODUSARCHITECTURE # PROJECT TEAM | | FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION MEP REVISIONS: MODUS ARCHITECTURE, PLLC. 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 P: 314.302.6864 SHEET NAME COOK CHILDREN'S PHYSICIAN NETWORK 801 SEVENTH AVE. FORT WORTH, TX 76104 P: 682.885.7037 V3 CONSULTING ENGINEERS 12801 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 540 DALLAS, TEXAS 75243 P: 972.643.8814 ISSUE DATE: TDLR:| 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G000 COVER SHEET PE R M I T S E T COOK CHILDREN'S PERMIT SET 12/19/2024 240212 1625 LANCASTER DRIVE GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 INDEX OF DRAWINGS SHEET NO.TITLE ON SHEET ISSUE DATE PERMIT SET 01 GENERAL G000 COVER SHEET 12/19/2024 • G001 GENERAL INFORMATION 12/19/2024 • G002 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS 12/19/2024 • G003 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS 12/19/2024 • G004 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS 12/19/2024 • G110 OVERALL LIFE SAFETY PLAN 12/19/2024 • G130 SPECIFICATIONS 12/19/2024 • G131 SPECIFICATIONS 12/19/2024 • G132 SPECIFICATIONS 12/19/2024 • G133 SPECIFICATIONS 12/19/2024 • G134 SPECIFICATIONS 12/19/2024 • G135 SPECIFICATIONS 12/19/2024 • 03 ARCH DEMO AD111 DEMO FLOOR PLAN 12/19/2024 • 04 ARCHITECTURAL A111 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN 12/19/2024 • A112 OVERALL POWER PLAN 12/19/2024 • A113 OVERALL EQUIPMENT PLAN 12/19/2024 • A121 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN & PLAN DETAILS 12/19/2024 • A511 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS 12/19/2024 • A611 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 12/19/2024 • A631 CEILING DETAILS 12/19/2024 • A711 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12/19/2024 • A712 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12/19/2024 • A821 TYPICAL CASEWORK SECTIONS 12/19/2024 • A822 TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS 12/19/2024 • A901 FINISH LEGEND 12/19/2024 • A911 FINISH FLOOR PLAN & FINISH DETAILS 12/19/2024 • 05 MECHANICAL MEP GENERAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS - MEP 12/19/2024 • M101 FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL 12/19/2024 • M201 SCHEDULES & DETAILS - MECHANICAL 12/19/2024 • M301 DETAILS - MECHANICAL 12/19/2024 • 06 PLUMBING P101 FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING 12/19/2024 • P201 SCHEDULES & DETAILS - PLUMBING 12/19/2024 • P202 SCHEDULES & DETAILS - PLUMBING 12/19/2024 • 07 ELECTRICAL E101 FLOOR PLAN - POWER 12/19/2024 • E102 FLOOR PLAN - POWER 12/19/2024 • E201 FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING 12/19/2024 • E301 SCHEDULES & DETAILS - ELECTRICAL 12/19/2024 • TABS2025007242 SYMBOLS: DRAWING NUMBER DEMOLITION NOTE NUMBER FIXTURE ACCESSORY NUMBER NEW DOOR DOOR SYMBOLS: DETAILS: DOOR NO. 10 1 A SHEET NUMBER 12 4 24 NOTE TAGS: SHEET NOTE NUMBER STRUCTURAL GRID BUBBLE DRAWING OR DETAIL NUMBER FIRE EXTINGUISHER & CABINET DISCPLINE DESIGNATORS: SYMBOLS: WALL FINISH TYPE ROOF DRAIN OVERFLOW ROOF DRAINORD RD ELEVATION MARK FLOOR DRAIN FIRE EXTINGUISHER FEC FE FD RE: 6/ A121 ROOM NAME/NUMBER: REFERENCE MARK: NORTH ARROW SYMBOL BREAK LINE A FLOOR LEVEL (2) SHEET NUMBER A251B SHEET NUMBER: DISCIPLINE SHEET IN SERIES AREA (B) IF USED SUB ROOM NUMBER (06A) OFFICE WALL SECTION AND DETAIL SYMBOLS: BUILDING SECTIONS: REVISION MARK/ CLOUD: SHEET NUMBER 1 REVISION NUMBER SHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER DIRECTION BUILDING SECTION NUMBER SYMBOLS - WINDOW TYPES/ DOOR & FRAME TYPES/ LOUVER TYPES: ELEVATION SYMBOLS: SHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER DIRECTION FIRE HYDRANTFH MATERIAL KEYNOTE A711 11 DRAWING NUMBER / SHEET NUMBER DIRECTION EXTERIOR INTERIOR A3.41 A4 DIRECTION EXISTING DOOR 10 1 A ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION CIVIL ARCHITECTURALA AD KC E ARCHITECTURAL SITEAS STRUCTURAL PLUMBING MECHANICAL KITCHEN P M S TECHNOLOGYT LANDSCAPEL BUILDING AREA "B" (IF USED) ROOM NAME B-206A MATCH LINE: AREA B AREA A KEY PLAN SYMBOL: D A BC HATCHED AREA IS AREA PLAN AS SHOWN ON SHEET SERIES ROOM NUMBER (06) A2 F1 L2 14 CASEWORK SYMBOLS: F FURNITURE & EQUIPMENT GENERALG BUILDING ADDITION NOTATION: NEW EXISTING GLASS TYPES DOOR FRAME NUMBER SYMBOL (F1, F2, F3, ETC...) LOUVER NUMBER SYMBOL (L1, L2, L3, ...) WINDOW NUMBER SYMBOL (A-Z; AA, AB - AZ; BA, BB - BZ...) 11 / A 7 1 1 A3.21 A3 A3.11 F1 A3.11 F1 22.22G EL ELECTRICAL - LIGHTING EP ELECTRICAL - POWER WALL SYMBOLS: NEW WALL EXISTING WALL EXISTING STRUCTURAL GRID BUBBLEA EXISTING DOOR TO BE REMOVED 10 1 A DOOR NO.DOOR NO. WIDTH B1CABINET TYPE: DEPTH DEMO EXISTING WALL TRUE PLAN ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS: +42" +42" DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 18" AFF TO CENTERLINE OF RECEPTACLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, CENTERLINE OF RECEPTACLE AS NOTED AFF QUAD RECEPTACLE, CENTERLINE OF RECEPTACLE AS NOTED AFF QUAD RECEPTACLE, 18" AFF TO CENTERLINE OF RECEPTACLE PT28 SUSP. CEILING SYSTEM REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SYMBOLS: CEILING HEIGHT9'-0" GYP. BD. SUPPLY RETURN 2X4 LIGHT FIXTURE 2X2 LIGHT FIXTURE DIRECT/INDIRECT PENDANT FIXTURE CAN LIGHT FIRE EXIT SIGN CONTROL JOINT IN GYP BD CEILING 2'X2' LAY-IN CEILING OPEN TO STRUCTURE EXHAUST 1X4 CONCEALED COVE LIGHT FIXTURE FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURE TRACK LIGHTING SPRINKLER HEAD SPEAKERS ABBREVIATIONS: G F H I J K L M N O P . CONTINUED... Q R S T U V W X,Y,Z, MISCELLANEOUS F . CONTINUED... SUSPENDED CORR CORRIDOR/ CORRUGATED SUSP CP CSMT CT CTR CPT CS DEMO DF DEPT DBL CU. CW DN DISP. DMT DIA. DIAG DR DH EQ EP EXH EWC ETR EST ESC FB EXP EXT FAB FA EXIST EQUIP FEC FF FE FD FBO FHC FIN FH FF&E FIXT EL ELEV EMERG ELAST ELEC DWG EJ EF EA DTL DS WINDOWWNDW & WR YD WH WP FINISH/ FINISHED FIXTURE FACE BRICK FIRE HOSE CABINET FIXTURES / FURNITURE / EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER FIRE EXTINGUISHER & BRACKET FIRE HYDRANT FINISH FLOOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FLOOR DRAIN AND AT WALL HYDRANT WATER RESISTANT WATERPROOFING/ WORKING POINT YARD VWC WC WD WB W/ W VEST VERT VT TYP VCT VB UNO UNFIN TZ UH TOW TRANSF TV THRU TOS TOD TOC TKBD THK SWGR T&G T&B TEL SYS SYM S.Y. DRAWING NO OD OPP OZ OPNG OH NRC NTS NOM OC MTD N/A MULL MTL MTG NIC N MOD MO MM EQUAL EXPANSION/ EXPANDED ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXISTING TO REMAIN FIRE ALARM ESCALATOR EQUIPMENT EXHAUST EXTERIOR EXISTING FABRICATE ESTIMATE ELEVATOR EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD ELASTOMERIC EXPANSION JOINT EXHAUST FAN ELECTRICAL ELEVATION EACH EAST ON CENTER OUTSIDE DIAMETER NOT TO SCALE NOISE REDUCTION COEFFICIENT OPPOSITE OUNCE OPENING OVERHEAD/ OPPOSITE HAND NOMINAL NOT IN CONTRACT METAL MASONRY OPENING MOUNTING NUMBER NOT APPLICABLE NORTH MULLION MOUNTED MODULAR MILLIMETER LVR MISC MFR MFG MEMB MED MECH MIN MH MBR MAX MAS LWC M LH LT(G) LPT LLV LLH LF LBS DOWNSPOUT DISPENSER DEMOUNTABLE DIAMETER DOUBLE HUNG DETAIL DOOR DOWN DIAGONAL DEMOLISH/ DEMOLITION DRINKING FOUNTAIN DEPARTMENT CASEMENT CUBIC COLD WATER CERAMIC TILE COUNTERSINK CONCRETE PIPE COUNTER DOUBLE CARPET METER (S) MISCELLANEOUS MANUFACTURER MECHANICAL MEMBRANE MANHOLE MINIMUM MANUFACTURING MEMBER MAXIMUM MASONRY MEDIUM LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE LONG LEG VERTICAL LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LINEAR FOOT (FEET) LOUVER LOW POINT LIGHT/ LIGHTING LEFT HAND POUNDS T WEST, WIDTH, WIDE, WATER WATER CLOSET VINYL WALLCOVERING WOOD WOOD BASE WITH VERTICAL VINYL TILE VESTIBULE VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VAPOR BARRIER (VPR.BR.) UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UNFINISHED UNIT HEATER TRANSFORMER TOP OF STEEL TOP OF CURB/ CONCRETE TERRAZZO TYPICAL TELEVISION TOP OF WALL TOP OF DECK THROUGH TONGUE & GROOVE TOP & BOTTOM SQUARE YARD (SQ.YD.) TACK BOARD THICK (NESS) TELEPHONE TREAD SYSTEM SWITCH GEAR SYMMETRICAL BOC BD BM BLDG BLKG BLK BTWN BIT CAB BRG BVL BSMT BRK BW CMU CCTV CAP CB BO CFM CIP CG CF CJ CLR CLOS CM CLG CL CMT COMB COL CO CMP CONST COORD CONTR CONT CONN CONC RETURN AIRRA SUBFLR STRUCT STOR STL STG STC STD SPEC SOG SP.HD. SPKR SOF SECT SCH SHT SHM SCN SAN RTU REQMT REQD REINF HEATING CLOSED CIRCUIT TV HTG LAB LAV LAM KIT INST INCAND INV INT INSUL INFO INCL HW HWH HVAC IN ID HTR CENTIMETER CONSTRUCT/ CONSTRUCTION CONTINUOUS COORDINATE CONTRACTOR CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE CORRUGATED METAL PIPE CONNECTION COMBINATION CLEAN OUT CONCRETE COLUMN CONTROL JOINT CLEAR/ CLEARANCE CENTER LINE CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CAST-IN-PLACE CORNER GUARD CUBIC FEET CAST IRON CEILING CLOSET INTERIOR INCANDESCENT LABORATORY LAMINATE (D) LAVATORY KITCHEN INVERT SS SQ INSTALL/ INSTALLATION INSULATE/ INSULATION INFORMATION INCLUDE (D), (ING) AIR CONDITIONING HOT WATER HEATER INSIDE DIAMETER HEATING/ VENTILATING/ INCH HOT WATER HEATER SIM SF SC HM HT HR HS HPT HORIZ GYP HC HK HDW HDR HD HDBD HB GOVT GPM GL GFRC BENCH MARK/ BEAM CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (S) CATCH BASIN BOTH WAYS BASEMENT CABINET CAPACITY BEARING BEVELED BRICK BOTTOM OF BACK OF CURB BITUMINOUS ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL AUTOMATIC ATTENUATION BOARD BUILDING BLOCKING BLOCK BETWEEN ATTEN AUTO AWP AVG AVERAGE GYPSUM HOLLOW CORE HOLLOW METAL HEAD HIGH STRENGTH HIGH POINT HOOK HEIGHT HOUR HORIZONTAL HARDWARE HEADER HARDBOARD HOSE BIBB RM RO S RFG RH REV GALLON PER MINUTE GOVERNMENT GLASS/ GLAZING GLASS FIBER REINF. CONC. REC (D) REF RCP RE: RD RB SOUTH SPEAKER STRUCTURE/ STRUCTURAL SOUND TRANSM. COEFFICIENT STAINLESS STEEL SEATING SUBFLOOR STORAGE STEEL STANDARD SQUARE SPRINKLER HEAD SLAB ON GRADE SPRAY-ON FIREPROOFING SECURITY HOLLOW METAL SANITARY SEWER SPECIFICATION (S) SIMILAR SHEET SCHEDULE SQUARE FOOT (SQ.FT.) SECTION SCREEN SOLID CORE ROUGH OPENING ROOF TOP UNIT RIGHT HAND REVISED/ REVISION ROOM ROOFING REINFORCE (D), (ING) REFRIGERATOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN RECEIVE (D) REQUIRED REQUIREMENT REFERENCE/ REFER TO ROOF DRAIN RESILIENT BASE PVMT PROJ PRELIM PREP FURR FDV GALV FUT GC GA FTG FT FR(FRM) FDN FOS ADD ADDENDUM ALUMINUM ARCH PRECAST CONCRETE ARCHITECT/ ARCHITECTURAL APPROXIMATE ACCESS PANEL ALTERNATE ANODIZED AIR HANDLING UNIT ABOVE FINISH FLOOR ADJUSTABLE/ ADJACENT ANOD APPROX ARCH APC AP ALUM ALT AHU AFF ADJ ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ACOUSTICAL AREA DRAIN ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL AIR CONDITIONING ACOUST ACT AD A/ C ACP GENERAL CONTRACTOR FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE GALVANIZED GAUGE FOOT/ FEET FUTURE FURRING FOOTING R QTY PVC PTD PT PSI FRAME (D), (ING) FACE OF STUDS FOUNDATION PSF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PAVEMENT QUANTITY RISER/ RADIUS/ REVERSED PAINTED POINT POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT PROJECT PRELIMINARY PREPARE (D) JST JT JC JAN JB JANITOR CLOSET JOIST JOINT JUNCTION BOX JANITOR A B C D E CI A/ V AUDIO/ VISUAL BRKT BRACKET DIM DIMENSION E FS FVC FIRE VALVE CABINET FLOOR SINK HDWD HARDWOOD KP KICK PLATE L LONG/ LENGTH LRG LARGE ORD OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN TOP TOP OF PARAPET TEMP TEMPORARY/ TEMPERED W/IN WITHIN W/O WITHOUT WT WEIGHT FLUOR FLR FLG FLUORESCENT FLASHING FLOOR FOG FOF FOC FACE OF CONCRETE FACE OF GYPSUM BOARD/ WALL FACE OF FINISH P PANEL BOARDPB PERP POLY PLUMB PNL PREFIN PLAS PLAM PL PERM PERF PREFAB PC PLASTER PERPENDICULAR POLYETHYLENE PLUMBING PANEL PLATE/ PROPERTY LINE PERFORATE (D) PERMANENT PLASTIC LAMINATE PREFINISHED PREFABRICATE (D) PRECAST CONCRETE PA PUBLIC ADDRESS PLYWD PLYWOOD R/W RIGHT OF WAY GB GRAB BAR TRANSM TRANSMISSION @ VTR VENT THROUGH ROOF FOM FACE OF MASONRY FFE FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION C COURSE BOT BOTTOM TOM TOP OF MASONRY OTS OPEN TO STRUCTURE 1. ALL CONTRACTORS AND THEIR SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL SHALL REVIEW THE GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT. 2. ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM WITH APPLICABLE BUILDING CODES, REGULATIONS AND ORDINANCES. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL REQUIRED BUILDING AND OCCUPANCY PERMITS. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL BECOME FULLY ACQUAINTED WITH CONDITIONS RELATED TO THE WORK. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE MEANS, METHODS, AND SEQUENCES OF CONSTRUCTION AND THE SAFETY OF ALL CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL AND VISITORS. 6. DRAWINGS CONTAINED IN THIS SET SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED FOR SHOP DRAWINGS. COPIES OF THESE DRAWINGS SUBMITTED AS SHOP DRAWINGS WILL BE REJECTED AND RETURNED TO THE CONTRACTOR. 7. EACH INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE SUBSTRATE AND/OR CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE WORK WILL BE INSTALLED AND REPORT TO THE CONTRACTOR IN WRITING ANY CONDITIONS DETRIMENTAL TO THE PROPER AND TIMELY EXECUTION OF THAT INSTALLERS WORK. DO NOT PROCEED UNTIL UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS ARE CORRECTED. COMMENCING WITH INSTALLATION SHALL CONSTITUTE ACCEPTANCE OF THE SUBSTRATE AND/OR CONDITIONS. 8. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS: FOLLOW WRITTEN DIMENSIONS AND NOTES. CONTACT ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATIONS, IF REQUIRED. 9. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLAN ARE TO THE FACE OF GYP. BOARD/ WALL (FOG), FACE OF MASONRY (FOM), FACE OF CONCRETE WALLS (FOC), AND COLUMN GRID LINES, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR INDICATED. 10. "TYPICAL", AS USED IN THESE DOCUMENTS, SHALL MEAN THAT THE CONDITION OR DIMENSION IS REPRESENTATIVE OF, OR THE SAME, FOR SIMILAR CONDITIONS THROUGHOUT. 11. IF THERE IS A DISCREPANCY BETWEEN SMALL SCALE AND LARGE SCALE DRAWINGS, (PLAN, SECTION, & DETAIL DRAWINGS, ETC.) - CONTACT ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION. FOR BIDDING PURPOSES: THE MOST EXPENSIVE AND/OR STRICTEST REQUIREMENTS SHALL GOVERN. FOR CLARIFICATIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION: THE MOST EXPENSIVE AND/OR STRICTEST REQUIREMENTS, AS INDICATED BY THE ARCHITECT, SHALL GOVERN. 12. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS - CONTACT ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION. FOR BIDDING PURPOSES: THE MOST EXPENSIVE AND/OR STRICTEST REQUIREMENTS SHALL GOVERN. FOR CLARIFICATIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION: THE MOST EXPENSIVE AND/OR STRICTEST REQUIREMENTS, AS INDICATED BY THE ARCHITECT, SHALL GOVERN. 13. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE DRAWINGS AND ACTUAL CONDITIONS SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING FOR RESOLUTION, PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 14. ANY AND ALL DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING FOR RESOLUTION, PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. IN THESE INSTANCES: NO CHANGE ORDERS OR EXTENSIONS OF TIME WILL BE ALLOWED OR ACCEPTED FOR PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK WITHOUT THE ARCHITECT’S WRITTEN DIRECTION AND APPROVAL. ALSO - CONTRACTOR MUST REPAIR AND/OR REPLACE ANY UNAUTHORIZED WORK, AS INDICATED BY THE ARCHITECT, AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. 15. ALL DISSIMILAR METAL MATERIALS SHALL BE ISOLATED WITH AN APPROVED NONMETAL ISOLATION MATERIAL. 16. OPEN EXTERIOR JOINTS AROUND WINDOW AND DOOR FRAMES, BETWEEN WALLS AND FOUNDATIONS, BETWEEN WALL PANELS, AND AT PENETRATIONS OF UTILITIES THROUGH THE BUILDING ENVELOPE, ETC. – SHALL BE SEALED, CAULKED, FLASHED OR WEATHER-STRIPPED AS REQUIRED FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH ADJACENT MATERIALS & TO ELIMINATE AIR LEAKAGE AND WATER ENTRY. 17. PROVIDE SEALANT AND/OR CAULKING BETWEEN DISSIMILAR ADJOINING INTERIOR MATERIALS. (I.E. WINDOW SILLS TO GYP. BD., ACT CEILINGS TO MASONRY WALLS, ETC.) 18. DOOR OPENINGS NOT LOCATED BY DIMENSION SHALL BE CENTERED IN WALL SHOWN OR LOCATED 2 INCHES FROM FINISH WALL TO FINISH JAMB, ALWAYS ALLOWING A MINIMUM OF 18" FROM THE PULL SIDE OF THE DOOR TO THE INTERSECTING WALL. 19. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES AND THEIR SERVICE CONNECTIONS WITH THE PROPER UTILITY COMPANY. 20. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SIZE, LOCATIONS AND NUMBER OF ALL ROOF OPENINGS AND ROOF ACCESSORIES WITH ALL OTHER TRADES. REFER TO THE ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 21. EXCEPT AT FIRE-RATED PARTITIONS, ALL WALL AND COLUMN GYPSUM BOARD FACING SHALL BE HELD AT 5/8 INCH BELOW STRUCTURE, UNLESS DETAILED OR NOTED OTHERWISE. 22. AT ALL TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS: PROVIDE 3/4" X 8'-0" HIGH FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD SHEATHING OR PROVIDE PLYWOOD OVER NON-COMBUSTIBLE SHEATHING; BOTTOM TO BE LOCATED AT 4" A.F.F. VERIFY LENGTHS AND LOCATIONS WITH ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 23. GLASS DOORS, ADJACENT PANELS AND ALL GLAZED OPENINGS WITHIN 1'-6" OF THE FLOOR, AND WITHIN A 24-INCH ARC OF EITHER VERTICAL EDGE OF A DOOR, ETC., SHALL BE SAFETY GLAZING AS APPROVED FOR IMPACT BY APPLICABLE BUILDING CODES, AND SHALL BE LABELED AS SUCH. 24. ALL CEILING HEIGHTS AS SHOWN ON PLANS AND DETAILS ARE FROM SLAB OR TILE FLOOR (FINISHED FLOOR) TO FINISH CEILING. 25. PROVIDE INDEPENDENT FRAMING & ATTACHMENTS TO THE STRUCTURE – ADEQUATE TO SUPPORT THE CEILING SYSTEM, LIGHT FIXTURES, DUCTS, DIFFUSERS, SPRINKLER PIPING AND BUS DUCTS. 26. ALL CLOSETS AND ALCOVES WITHOUT A SPACE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL HAVE THE SAME FINISHES AS ADJOINING SPACES. 27. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL FR WOOD BLOCKING AND FR PLYWOOD AS REQUIRED FOR THE MOUNTING OF ALL TOILET ACCESSORIES, MILLWORK/ CASEWORK, AV EQUIPMENT, MEP ITEMS, AND RADIOLOGY EQUIPMENT, OWNER MOUNTED EQUIPMENT, ETC. COORD WITH OWNER FOR FINAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS. 28. RE: SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALL REQUIRED TESTING AND INSPECTIONS. 29. ANY/ ALL PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS DESCRIBED AND/OR DRAWN IN THE DOCUMENTS (BUT NOT SPECIFIED) ARE TO MEET THE MANUFACTURER’S STANDARD CRITERIA WHICH IS NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS, QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS, APPLICABLE CODES AND INDUSTRY STANDARDS, FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY, HANDLING, DELIVERY, STORAGE, INSTALLATION, OPERATION, ADJUSTMENTS, ETC. PROVIDE THE MANUFACTURER’S STANDARD WARRANTY AND STANDARD FINISH WARRANTY. PROVIDE PRODUCT DATA, SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, AND MAINTENANCE DATA AS REQUIRED. REFER TO DIVISION 01 SPEC. SECTIONS WHICH ALSO APPLY - SUCH AS SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS, REFERENCES, EXECUTION, AND CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. NOTE: ANY SUBSTITUTIONS MUST MEET THE DESIGN INTENT, AS WELL AS THE CRITERIA DESCRIBED ABOVE. 30. COORD. W/ OWNER FOR FINAL LOCATION & BLOCKING REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. 31. TENANT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT IS NIC BUT IS SHOWN AS DASHED FOR CLARITY, GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH ALL DISCIPLINES INVOLVED WITH SURROUNDING CLEARANCES, UTILITY ROUGHIN, AND CONSTRUCTION. 32. ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL HAVE 6" OF BATT INSULATION FOR FULL HEIGHT OF WALL. GC TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND PROVIDE INSULATION. AS REQ. 33. ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL BE FINISHED WITH PAINTED GYP. BD. TO 6" ABOVE FINISH CEILING. 34. ALL INTERIOR FINISHES TO BE CLASS A FLAME SPREAD PER IBC REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 803. DOCUMENTS FOR DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTAL ITEMS SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE WHO SHALL REVIEW THEM AND FORWARD TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL WITH A NOTATION INDICATING THE DEFERRED SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN REVIEWED AND FOUND TO BE IN GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE DESIGN OF THE BUILDING. THIS LIST IS PROVIDED TO ASSIST WITH DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS. THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE REQUESTED AS DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS AS THEY ARE SPECIFIED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL AS DELEGATED-DESIGN ITEMS: 1. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SYSTEM 2. AUTOMATIC FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 3. FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS 4. SIGNAGE / EXTERIOR GRAPHICS 5. METAL FABRICATIONS DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTAL GENERAL INFORMATION NOTES SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G001 GENERAL INFORMATION PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 402.2 Components Accessible routes shall consist of one or more of the following components: walking surfaces with a running slope not steeper than 1:20. doorways, ramps, curb ramps excluding the flared sides. elevators, and platform lifts. 403.3 Slope Running slope shall not exceed 1:20. If slope exceeds 1:20, refer to 'ramps' or 'curb ramps' sections. Cross slope shall not exceed 1:48. 403.4 Changes in Level • Up to 1/4": requires no edge treatment (vertical edge permitted). • 1/4" to 1/2": Edge shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2. • Greater than 1/2": Requires curb ramp, ramp, elevator, or platform lift. • Stairs shall not be part of an accessible route. 403.5.1 Width Minimum clear width of walking surfaces shall be 36" (except as allowed at doors). 403.5.2 Clear Width at Turns Where the accessible route makes a 180 degree turn around an element which is less than 48" wide, clear width shall be 42" minimum approached the turn, 48" minimum at the turn and 42" minimum leaving the turn. 403.5.3 Passing Space An accessible route with a clear width less than 60" shall provide passing spaces at intervals of 200' maximum. Passing spaces shall be either: a space 60" minimum; or, an intersection of two walking surfaces providing a t-shaped space complying with turning space requirements, where the base and arms of the "T" extend 48" minimum beyond the intersection. 307.4 Vertical Clearance Vertical clearance shall be 80" high minimum. Guardrails or other barriers shall be provided where the vertical clearance is less than 80" high. The leading edge of such guardrail or barrier shall be located 27" maximum above the finish floor or ground. 705.1 Detectable Warnings (Required within Public Right-of-Way & Platform Edge) At Hazardous Vehicular Areas. If a walk within an accessible route crosses or adjoins a vehicular way, and the walking surfaces are not separated by curbs, railings, or other elements between the pedestrian areas and vehicular areas, the boundary between the areas shall be defined by a continuous detectable warning 24" wide, complying the requirements below. Detectable Warnings: Surface shall consist of raised truncated domes with the following features: • Diameter: 0.9" nominal, • Height: 0.2" nominal, • Surface: Shall visually contrast with adjoining surfaces. 302.2 Carpet Carpet or carpet tile shall: • Be securely attached; • Have a firm cushion, pad, or backing (or none); • Have a level loop, textured loop, level cut pile, or level cut/uncut pile texture; • Have a maximum pile thickness of 1/2"; • Have exposed edges fastened with edge trim the entire length of exposed edge. 302.3 Opening (Gratings) Opening in floor or ground surfaces shall allow passage of sphere more than 1/2" diameter. Elongated openings shall be placed so that the long dimension is perpendicular to the dominate direction of travel. 204.3 Turning Space • The circular turning space shall be a space of 60" diameter minimum. The space shall be permitted to include knee and toe clearance. • The T-shaped turning space shall be T-shaped space within a 60" square minimum with arms and base 36" wide minimum. Each arm shall be clear of obstructions 12" minimum in each direction and the base shall be clear of obstruction 24" minimum. 305 Clear Floor Space The clear floor or ground space shall be 30" by 48", and may be positioned for either a forward or parallel approach. • If a forward approach clear floor space extends more than 24" into an alcove, the minimum alcove width shall be 36". • If a parallel approached clear floor space extends more than 15" into an alcove, the minimum alcove length shall be 60". 306 Knee and Toe Clearance Where space beneath an element is included as part of clear floor or ground space or turning space, the space shall comply with required knee and toe clearance. Additional space shall not be prohibited beneath an element but shall not be considered as part of the clear floor or ground space or turning space. 306.2 Toe Clearance • Space under an element between the finish floor and 9" above the finished floor shall be considered toe clearance. • Toe clearance shall extend 25" maximum under an element. • Where toe clearance is required at an element as part of a clear floor space, the tow clearance shall extend 17" minimum under the element. • Space extending greater than 6" beyond the available knee clearance at 9: above the finish floor shall not be considered toe clearance. • Toe clearance shall be 30" wide minimum. 206.3 Knee Clearance • Space under an element between 9" and 27" above the finish shall be considered knee clearance. • Knee clearance shall extend 25" maximum under an element at 9" above the finish floor. • Where knee clearance is required under an element as part of a clear floor space, the knee clearance shall be 11" deep minimum at 9" above the finish floor, and 8" deep minimum at 27" above the finish floor. • Between 9" and 27" above the finish floor, the knee clearance shall be permitted to reduce at a rate of 1" in depth for each 6" in height. • Knee clearance shall be 30" wide minimum. 307 Protruding Object • Objects projecting from walls with their leading edges between 27" and 80" above the finished floor shall protrude no more than 4" into walks or corridors. • Objects projecting from walls with their leading edge at or below 27" above the finished floor may protrude any amount. • Free-standing objects mounted on posts or pylons shall overhang 12" maximum when located 27" to 80" above the finished floor or ground. • Protruding objects shall not reduce the required clear width of an accessible route or maneuvering space. 308 Reach Ranges • where a forward reach is unobstructed, the high forward reach shall be 48" maximum and the low forward reach shall be 15" minimum above finish floor or ground. • Where a high forward reach is over an obstruction, the clear floor space shall extend beneath the element for a distance not less than the required reach depth over the obstruction. The high forward reach shall be 48" maximum where the reach depth is 20" maximum. Where the reach depth exceeds 20", the high forward reach shall be 44" maximum and the reach depth shall be 25" maximum. • Where a parallel approach is unobstructed, the high side reach shall be 48 maximum and the low side reach shall be 15" minimum above finish floor. • Where a high side reach is over an obstruction, the height of the obstruction shall be 34" maximum and the depth of the obstruction shall be 24" maximum. The high side reach be 48" maximum for a reach depth up to 10", and 46" for a reach depth 10"-24" above the finish floor. 309 Operable Parts All controls and operating mechanisms is accessible spaces, along accessible routes, and as parts of accessible elements, shall comply with th following: • Clear floor space shall be provided to allow forward or parallel approach. • Heights of all operable portions shall comply with the reach ranges. Electrical and communications system receptacles on walls shall be 15" minimum above the floor. • Controls and operating mechanisms shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. The force required to activate controls shall be no greater than 5 pounds maximum. 404.1 General Doors, doorways, and gates that are part of an accessible route shall comply with this section. 404.2.1 Revolving Doors, Gates, and Turnstiles Revolving doors, revolving gates, and turnstiles shall not be part of an accessible route. 404.2.2 Double-leaf Doors and Gates At least one of the active leaves of the doorway with two leaves shall comply with this section. 404.2.3 Clear Width Door openings shall provide a clear opening of 32" minimum. Clear openings of doorways with swinging doors shall be measured between the face of the door and stop, with the door open 90 degrees. Openings more than 24" deep shall provide a clear opening of 36" minimum. There shall be no projections into the clear required clear opening width lower than 34" above the finish floor or ground. Projections into the clear opening width between 34" and 80" above finish floor or ground shall not exceed 4". Exception: Door closers and door stops shall be permitted to be 78" minimum above the finish floor or ground. 404.2.4 Maneuvering Clearances • Maneuvering clearances shall extend the full width of the door way and the required latch side or hinge side clearance, as shown in figures 404.2.4.1 and 404.2.4.2. • Maneuvering clearances, in addition to doorway width, are required at recessed doors and gates (all dimensions are minimum), as shown in figure 404.2.4.3. 404.2.5 Thresholds Thresholds, if provided at doorways, shall be 1/2 inch high maximum. 404.2.6 Doors in Series and Gates in Series The distance between two hinged or pivoted doors in series and gates in series shall be 48" minimum plus the width of doors or gates swinging into the space. 404.2.7 Door and Gate Hardware Handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operable parts on doors and gates shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist to operate. • Level-operated mechanisms, pull-type mechanisms, and U-shaped handles are acceptable designs. • Operable parts of such hardware shall be 34" minimum and 48" maximum above the finish floor or ground. • Where sliding door are in the fully open position, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. • The forces required to activate operable parts shall be 5 pounds maximum. 404.2.8.1 Door Closers and Gate Closers Door closers and gate closers shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the time required to move the door to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum. 404.3.9 Door and Gate Opening Forces Fire doors shall have a minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority. The force for pushing or pulling open a door or gate other than fire doors shall be as follows: 1. Interior hinged doors and gates: 5 pound maximum. 2. Sliding or folding doors: 5 pounds maximum. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a closed position. 404.2.11 Vision Lights Doors, gates, and side lights adjacent to doors or gates, containing one or more glazing panels that permit viewing through the panels shall have the bottom of at least one glazed panel located 43" maximum above the finish floor. Exception: Vision lights with the lowest part more than 66" from the finish floor or ground shall not be required to comply with 404.2.11. 404.3 Automatic Doors and Power-Assisted Doors and Gates Full-powered automatic doors shall comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.10-1999. Lowe-energy and power-assisted doors shall comply with ANSI A156.19 (1997 or 2002 edition). Doorways shall provide a clear opening of 32" minimum in power-on and power-off mode. The minimum clear width for automatic door systems in a doorway shall be based on the clear opening provided by all leaves in the open position. 402: ACCESSIBLE ROUTE 404: DOORS, DOORWAYS, & GATES 1/ 4 " M A X 1/ 4 " - 1 / 2 " Changes in Level 2 1 T-Shaped Turning Space Figure 304.3.2 Clear Floor or Ground Space Figure 305.5 Toe & Knee Clearance Figure 306.2 & 306.3 18" min. 60 " m i n 48 " m i n 48 " m i n 12" min 36" min 60 " m i n 42" min 54 " m i n 24" min 48 " m i n 48 " m i n 22" min 48 " m i n 22" min 42 " m i n 24" min 48 " m i n 24" min 24" min 54 " m i n 48 " m i n 42 " m i n 42 " m i n 22" min 42 " m i n 24" min 18" min x > 8 " 60 " m i n 12" min 48 " m i n x > 8 " 48 " m i n x > 8 " Maneuvering Clearances at Recessed Doors &Gates Figure 404.2.4.3 (b) push side (a) push side (c) push side, door provided with both closer and latch (a) front approach (b) side approach (c) pocket or hinge approach (d) stop or latch approach Maneuvering Clearances at Doorways without Doors, Sliding Doors, Gates, & Folding Doors Figure 404.2.4.2 Maneuvering Clearances at Manual Swing Doors & Gates Figure 404.2.4.1 (k) latch approach,push side, door provided with closer (i) latch approach,pull side, door provided with closer (h) latch approach,pull side (g) hinge approach, push side, door provided with both closer and latch (f) hinge approach, push side (e) hinge approach, pull side (c) front approach, push side, door provided with both closer and latch (d) hinge approach, pull side (b) front approach, push side (a) front approach, pull side (j) latch approach,push side 27 " m a x clear width amount any STAIRS 80 " m i n 4" max 27 " m i n >20" up to 25" max 44 " m a x 20" max 48 " m a x 48 " m a x 15 " m i n 10" max 15 " m i n 48 " m a x 10" max 34 " m a x 48 " m a x > 10" up to 24" max 34 " m a x 48 " m a x 9" m i n 27 " m i n 8" min 11" min 9" . 6" max Unobstructed Side Reach Figure 308.3.1 Unobstructed High Side Reach Figure 308.3.2 Unobstructed Forward Reach Figure 308.2.1 Unobstructed High Forward Reach Figure 308.3.2 Protruding Object Clearance 30 " m i n 48" min 30" min 48 " m i n 12" min 36" min 12" min 60 " m i n 24 " m i n 36 " m i n base ar m ar m 60" min 1. NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MEASURED FROM FLOOR, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 2. ADA UNOBSTRUCTED REACH RANGES: ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 3. ELEVATORS: STANDARD CALL BUTTONS: 35”TO 48”TO C.L. & PROTRUDE 1”MAX. ADA CALL BUTTONS: 42”TO C.L. (TYP.) & 48”MAX. (3/4”SMALLEST DIM.). ADA VISIBLE SIGNALS: 72”MIN. TO C.L. (2 1/2”SMALLEST DIM.). TACTILE SIGNAL ON HOISTWAY: 60”TO BASE OF CHARACTERS W/ TACTILE STAR & 2”HIGH CHARACTERS. 4. DOOR HARDWARE (TO CENTER OF HARDWARE): STANDARD MOUNTING HEIGHTS: PUSH PLATES = 42", PULL HANDLES = 42", KNOBS/ LEVERS = 40", PANIC EXIT = 42" CENTERLINE OF BAR, KICKPLATES: WIDTH = DOOR WIDTH MINUS 2”, CENTER, HEIGHT = 16”FROM B.O. DOOR. THRESHOLDS: STANDARD = 1/2" MAX. AT EXT. SLIDING DOORS = 3/4”MAX., ADA HARDWARE = 34”MIN. TO 48”MAX. 5. DRINKING FOUNTAINS & EWC'S (TO SPOUT): STANDARD = 38”MIN., 43" MAX. ADA =36" MAX. (27" MIN. CLEAR KNEE SPACE) 6. COUNTERTOPS (TO SINK RIM/ COUNTERTOP): ADA = 28”MIN. TO 34" MAX. 7. WATER CLOSETS (TO TOP OF SEAT): STANDARD = 14”TO 15". ADA (TO TOP OF SEAT) = 17" TO 19”. ADA FLUSH CONTROLS = 44" MAX. 8. URINALS (TO RIM): STANDARD = 24" MAX. ADA =17" MAX. ADA FLUSH CONTROLS = 44" MAX. 9. LAVATORIES (TO SINK RIM/ COUNTERTOP): STANDARD = 36" MAX. ADA = 34" MAX. (29" MIN. CLEAR KNEE SPACE) 10. MIRRORS (TO B.O. REFLECTIVE SURFACE): STANDARD = VARIES. ADA = 40" MAX. 11. GRAB BARS -ADA (TO TOP OF BAR): WATER CLOSETS = 33”MIN. TO 36" MAX. SHOWERS = 33”MIN. TO 36" MAX. (FROM B.O.SHOWER). BATHTUBS: TOP BAR = 33”MIN. TO 36" MAX. BOT. BAR = 9”ABOVE T.O. TUB 12. SHOWER HEADS (FROM FLOOR TO HEAD): STANDARD = 72" TO 84”. ADA = SPRAY UNIT W/ HOSE 60”LONG MIN. ADA = FIXED SHOWER HEAD = 48”AFF. 13. SHOWER CONTROLS (TO CONTROL AREA): STANDARD = 48”MAX. (TO TOP). ADA = 38" MIN. TO 48" MAX. 14. SHOWER ROD (FROM FLOOR TO C.L.): STANDARD = 78" MAX. 15. TOILET ROOM PARTITIONS: TOILETS = 12" TO BOT. & 70”TO TOP. URINALS = 18" TO BOT. & 60”TO TOP 16. TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS (TO C.L. OF OUTLET): STANDARD = 24". ADA = 19”MIN. TO 24" MAX. 17. WALL MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSERS (TO C. L. OF PUSH BUTTON): STANDARD = 40". ADA = VARIES. RE: OBSTRUCTED AND UNOBSTRUCTED REACH RANGES. ADA SIDE REACH = 46”MAX. ABOVE SINK INCOUNTER. 18. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER/ WASTE RECEPTACLE (TO TOWEL SLOT): STANDARD = 40" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 19. WARM AIR HAND DRYER (TO PUSH SWITCH): STANDARD = 44" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 20. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER (TO C.L. OF COIN SLOT): STANDARD = 40" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 21. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL (TO TOP OF UNIT): STANDARD = 28" MAX. ADA = 19”MIN. TO 24" MAX. (TO OPNG.) 22. TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSERS (TO OPNG.): STANDARD = 40" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 23. SHELVES: ADA = 48" MAX. 24. COAT HOOKS: STANDARD = 68". ADA = 48" MAX. 25. CHALKBOARDS, TACKBOARDS,& MARKERBOARDS: STANDARD = 32" TO 39” (TO B.O. BOARD OR CHALKTRAY). STANDARD = 80”(RECOMMENDED, TO T.O. BOARD) 26. THERMOSTATS & CONTROL DEVICES (TO TOP): ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. 27. LIGHT SWITCHES & CARD READERS (TO C.L.): LOCATE 6”FROM DOOR JAMB. ADA = 48”MAX. 28. CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES – ELECTRICAL/ TELEPHONE/ DATA (TO C.L.): STANDARD = 18". ADA = 15”MIN. 29. EXIT LIGHTS -WALL MOUNTED: 2" MIN. BELOW CEILING. 2”MIN. ABOVE DOOR FRAME. EQUAL SPACE FROM CEILING TO TOP OF FRAME 30. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (TO TOP, U.N.O.): GROSS WT. 40 LBS. OR LESS = 60" MAX. GROSS WT. MORE THAN 40 LBS. = 42" MAX. ADA = 40" MAX. (B.O. CABINET) 31. FIRE ALARM PULL STATIONS (TO LEVER): STANDARD = 48" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. ADA SIDE REACH = 48” MAX. 32. SMOKE AND/OR HEAT DETECTORS: STANDARD = CEILING HEIGHT 33. HORN/ SPEAKER/ VISUAL SIGNALS: STANDARD = 80”AFF. OR 6”BELOW CEILING -WHICHEVER IS LOWER. 34. ROOM SIGNAGE (TO C.L.): STANDARD = 60” HIGH AFF. & WITHIN 18”OF LATCH SIDE OF DOOR GENERAL NOTES ADA GUIDELINES SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G002 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 211.2 Minimum Number No fewer than two drinking fountains shall be provided. One drinking fountain shall comply with low spout height requirements and one with high spout requirements. Exception: Where a single drinking fountain complies with both requirements, it shall permitted to be substituted for two separate drinking fountains. 602.2 Clear Floor Space Units shall have a clear floor or ground space complying with required Clear Floor Area and Knee and Toe Clearances of 2012 TAS, positioned for a forward approach and centered on the unit. 602.3 Operable Parts Controls shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. The force required to activate controls shall be no greater than 5 pounds maximum. 602.4 Spout Height Spout outlets shall be 36" maximum above the finish floor. 602.5 Spout Location The spout shall be located 15" minimum from the vertical support and 5" maximum from the front edge of the unit, including bumpers. 602.7 Drinking Fountains for Standing Persons Spout outlets of drinking fountains for standing persons shall be 38" minimum and 43" maximum above the finish floor. 603.2 Clearances • All accessible fixtures and controls shall be on an accessible route. • Compliant turning space shall be provided within the room. • Required clear floor spaces, clearance at fixtures, and turning space shall be permitted to overlap. • Doors shall not swing into the clear floor space or clearance required for any fixture. Doors shall be permitted to wing into the required turning space. 703 Signs Where all toilet and bathrooms are not accessible, accessible toilet and bathrooms shall be identified by a sign showing the International Symbol of Accessibility. Refer to Section 703 SIGNS. 604.2 Location • The water closet shall be positioned with a wall or partition to the rear and to one side. The centerline of the water closet shall be 16" minimum to 18" maximum from the side wall or partition, • except that the water closet shall be 17: minimum and 19" maximum from the side wall or partition in the ambulatory accessible toilet compartment. • Clearance around a water closet shall be 60" minimum measured perpendicular from the side wall and 56" minimum measured perpendicular from the rear wall. • The required clearance around the water closet shall be permitted to overlap the water closet, associated grab bars, dispensers, sanitary napkin disposal units, coat hooks, shelves, accessible routes, clear floor space and clearances required at other fixtures, and the turning space. No other fixtures or obstructions shall be located within the required water closet clearance. • When the door to a toilet room is placed directly in front of the water closet, the water closet cannot overlap the required maneuvering clearance for the door inside the room. 604.4 Seats The seat height of a water closet above the finish floor shall be 17" minimum and 19" maximum measured to the top of the seat. Seats shall not be sprung to return to a lifted position. 604.5 Grab Bars Grab bars shall be provided on the side wall closest to the water closet and on the rear wall, per section 609: GRAB BARS. 604.5.1 Side Wall The side wall grab bar shall be 42" long minimum, located 12" maximum from the rear wall and extending 54" minimum from the rear wall. 604.5.2 Rear Wall The rear wall grab bar shall be 36" long minimum and extend from the centerline of the water closet 12" minimum on one side and 24" minimum on the other side. 604.6 Flush Controls • Controls shall be hand operated or automatic. • Controls shall be located on the open side of the water closet • Controls shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. • The force required to activate controls shall be no greater than 5 pound maximum. 604.7 Dispensers Toilet paper dispensers shall be installed on the side wall, below the grab bar, 7" minimum and 9" maximum in front of the water closet measured to the centerline of the dispenser. The outlet of the dispenser shall be 15" minimum and 48" maximum above the finish floor and shall not be located behind grab bar. Dispensers shall not be of a type that controls delivery or that does not allow continuous paper flow. 604.8 Toilet Compartments Standard Wheelchair Accessible Compartments shall be: • 60" wide minimum measured perpendicular to the side wall. • 59" deep minimum for floor mounted water closets, and 56" deep minimum for wall hung water closets, measured perpendicular to the rear wall. • The required minimum space cannot be obstructed by baby changing tables or other fixtures or conveniences, except as specified in Overlap. • Toilet compartment doors, including door hardware, shall comply with 404 DOORS, except that if the approach is to the latch side of the compartment door, clearance between the door side of the compartment and any obstruction shall be 42" minimum. Doors shall be located in the front partition or in the side wall or partition farthest from the water closet. Where located in the front partition, the door opening shall be 4" maximum from the side wall or partition farthest from the water closet. Where located in the side wall or partition, the door opening shall be 4" maximum from the from front partition. The door shall be self-closing. A door pull be placed on both sides of the door near the latch. Toilet compartment doors shall not swing into the minimum required compartment area. Clear width of opening at door shall be 32" minimum, per DOORS 404.2.3. • Toe Clearance: The front partition and at least one side partition shall provide a toe clearance of 9" minimum above the finish floor and 6" deep minimum beyond the compartment-side face of the partition, exclusive of partition support members. Ambulatory Accessible Compartments (required when more than 6 water closets or combination of water closets and urinals are provided) shall be: • 60" minimum deep, • 35" minimum and 37" maximum wide. • Doors shall not swing into the minimum required compartment area. • A side grab bar shall be provided on both sides of the compartment. 608.3 Coat Hooks & Shelves Coat hooks shall be located within one of the reach ranges in 308 Reach Ranges. Shelves shall be located 40" Minimum and 48" maximum above finish floor. 606.2 Clear Floor Space A clear floor space 30" by 48", positioned for a forward approach, and required Knee and Toe Clearances shall be provided. The clear floor space shall adjoin or overlap an accessible route. 606.3 Height Lavatories and sinks shall be installed with the front of the higher of the rim or counter surface 34" maximum above the finish floor or ground. 606.4 Faucets • Controls shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting or the write. • The force required to activate controls shall be no greater than 5 pounds maximum. • Hand-operated metering faucets shall remain open from 10 seconds minimum. 606.5 Exposed Pipes and Surfaces Water supply and drain pipes under lavatories and sinks shall be insulated or otherwise configured to protect against contact. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under lavatories and sinks. 603.3 Mirrors • Mirrors located above lavatories or countertops shall be installed with the bottom edge of the reflection surface 40" maximum above the finish floor. Mirrors not located above lavatories or countertops shall be installed with the bottom edge of the reflecting 35" maximum above the finish floor. • A single full-length mirror can accommodate a greater number of people including children. In order for mirrors to be usable by people who are ambulatory and people who use wheelchairs, the top edge of mirrors should be 74" minimum from finish floor. 609.2 & 609.3 Cross Section and Spacing Grab bars with circular cross sections shall have an outside diameter of 1 14" minimum and 2" maximum. Grab bars with non-circular cross sections shall have a cross section dimension of 2 inches maximum and a perimeter dimension of 4" minimum and 4.8" maximum. The space between grab bars and adjacent walls shall be 1-1/2". 609.4 Position of Grab Bars Grab bars shall be installed in a horizontal position, 3" minimum and 36" maximum above the finish floor measured to the top of the gripping surface, expect that at children's water closet grab bars shall be installed 18" minimum and 27" maximum above finish floor. 609.5 Surface Hazards Grab bars and any wall or other surfaces adjacent to grab bars shall be free of sharp or abrasive elements and shall have rounded edges. 609.6 Fittings Grab bars shall not rotate in their fittings. 609.8 Structural Strength Allowable stresses shall not be exceeded for materials used when a vertical or horizontal force of 250 pounds is applied at any point on the grab bar, fastener, mounting device, or supporting structure. 610.3 Shower Compartment Seats • Where a seat is provided in a standard roll-in shower, it shall be a folding type, shall be installed on the side wall adjacent to the controls, and shall extend from the back wall to a point within 3" of the compartment entry. • Where a seat is provided in an alternate roll-in type shower, it shall be a folding type, shall be installed on the front wall opposite the back wall, and shall extend from the adjacent side wall to a point within 3" of the compartment entry. • In transfer-type showers, the seat shall extend from the back wall to a point within 3" of the compartment entry. • The top of the seat shall be 17" and 19" maximum above the bathroom finish floor. 610.3.1 Rectangular Seats The rear edge of a rectangular seat shall be 2 1/2" maximum, and the front edge shall be 15" minimum and 16" maximum from the seat wall. The side edge of the seat shall be 1 1/2" maximum from the adjacent wall. 610.3.2 L-Shaped Seats The rear edge of an L-shaped seat shall be 2 1/2" maximum, and the front edge 15" minimum and 16" maximum from the seat wall. The rear edge of the "L" portion of the seat shall be 1 1/2" maximum from the wall and the front edge shall be 14" minimum and 15" maximum from the wall. The end of the "L" shall be 22" minimum and 23" maximum from the main seat wall. 610.4 Structural Strength Allowable stresses shall not be exceeded for materials used when a vertical or horizontal force of 250 pounds is applied at any point on the seat, fastener, mounting device, or supporting structure. 316.2 Designations Interior and exterior signs identifying permanent rooms and spaces shall comply with the requirements for: • Raised and Braille Characters and Pictograms • Finish and Contrast • Mounting Locations and Heights 703.1 Where Applicable Elements and spaces of accessible facilities which shall be identified by the International Symbol of Accessibility are: • Parking spaces designated as reserved for persons with disabilities; • Accessible passenger loading zones; • Accessible entrances when not all are accessible (inaccessible entrances shall have directional signage to indicate route to nearest accessible entrance); • Accessible toilet and bathing facilities when not all are accessible. 703.2 Raised Characters Raised characters shall be: • 1/32" minimum above their background, • uppercase, • sans serif (not italic, oblique, script, highly decorative, or other unusual forms), • a font where width of uppercase letter "O" is 55% minimum and 110% maximum of the height of uppercase letter "I", • height measured vertically from the baseline of the character shall be 5/8" minimum and 2" maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter "I". • (Refer to full text of 2012 TAS for signs mounted greater than 70" above finish floor.) 703.3 Braille • Braille shall be Grade 2 and positioned below the corresponding text. • (Refer to full text of 2012 TAS for specifics of Braille requirements.) 703.4 Installation Height and Location • Tactile characters on signs shall be located 48" minimum and above all the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the lowest tactile character and 60" maximum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the highest tactile character. • Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side. Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch the inactive leaf. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door. 703.5.1 Finish and Contrast Characters and their background shall have a non-glare finish. Characters shall contrast with their background with either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. 703.6 Pictograms Pictograms shall have a field height of 6" minimum. Characters and braille shall not be located in the pictogram field. Pictograms and their field shall have a non-glare finish. Pictograms shall contrast with their field with either a light pictogram on a dark field or a dark pictogram on a light field. Pictograms shall have text descriptors located directly below the pictogram field. 703.7 Symbols of Accessibility • Facilities and elements required to be identified as accessible shall use the International Symbol of Accessibility. • Text Telephones, when required, shall be identified by the International TTY symbol. • Volume Control Telephones, When required, shall be identified by a pictogram of a telephone handset with radiating sound waves on a square field. • Assistive Listening Systems, when required, shall be identified by the International Symbol of Access for Hearing Loss. 602: DRINKING FOUNTAINS 603: TOILET AND BATHING ROOMS 606: LAVATORIES & SINKS / 603: MIRRORS 610: SEATS 609: GRAB BARS 703: SIGNS 5" max 15" min fo r s t a n d i n g p e r s o n 38 " m i n t o 4 8 " m a x t o s p o u t 36 " m a x t o s p o u t 27 " m i n 9" m i n 6" max8" min 604: WATER CLOSETS AND TOILET COMPARTMENTS 33 " t o 3 6 " 42" min 54" min 12" max 6' - 10 3/4" 12" min 24" min 17 " - 1 9 " transfer side 48 " m a x 15 " m i n 7"-9" 9" m i n 6" min partition 6" min 6" m i n planelevation 4" m a x 4" max 42 " m i n alternate door location 42 " m i n 35" - 37" 60 " m i n 17" - 19" 16" - 18" 56 " m i n 60" min 16" - 18" 59 " m i n 60" min 34 " m a x bo t t o m o f m i r r o r 40 " m a x t o 2 1/2" max 3" m a x 1 1 / 2 " m a x seat wall seat wall seat wall 1 1 / 2 " m a x 3" m a x 2 1/2" maxcompartment entry compartment entry 22" - 23" 14 " - 1 5 " 15" - 16" 15" - 16" centered on 18"x18" clear space AREA OF REFUGE clear space 18" min cl e a r s p a c e 18 " m i n centered on tactile characters 6" m i n Side & Rear Wall Grab Bars Figure 604.5.1 & 604.5.2 Dispenser Outlet Location Figure 604.7 (b) distance from wall (a) size Size of Wheelchair Accessible Compartment Figure 604.8.1.1 Wheelchair Accessible Compartment Doors Figure 604.8.1.2 Ambulatory Accessible Compartment Figure 604.8.2 Wheelchair Accessible Compartment Toe Clearance Figure 604.8.1.4 (a) wall hung water closet (b) floor mounted water closet not in pictogram field Height of Tactile Characters Above Finish Floor Figure 703.4.1 Location of Tactile Signs at Doors Figure 703.4.2 Pictorgram Field Figure 703.6.1 International Symbol of Accessibility Figure 703.7.2.1 TTY Volume Control Hearing Loss 48 " m i x 60 " m a x 1. NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MEASURED FROM FLOOR, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 2. ADA UNOBSTRUCTED REACH RANGES: ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 3. ELEVATORS: STANDARD CALL BUTTONS: 35”TO 48”TO C.L. & PROTRUDE 1”MAX. ADA CALL BUTTONS: 42”TO C.L. (TYP.) & 48”MAX. (3/4”SMALLEST DIM.). ADA VISIBLE SIGNALS: 72”MIN. TO C.L. (2 1/2”SMALLEST DIM.). TACTILE SIGNAL ON HOISTWAY: 60”TO BASE OF CHARACTERS W/ TACTILE STAR & 2”HIGH CHARACTERS. 4. DOOR HARDWARE (TO CENTER OF HARDWARE): STANDARD MOUNTING HEIGHTS: PUSH PLATES = 42", PULL HANDLES = 42", KNOBS/ LEVERS = 40", PANIC EXIT = 42" CENTERLINE OF BAR, KICKPLATES: WIDTH = DOOR WIDTH MINUS 2”, CENTER, HEIGHT = 16”FROM B.O. DOOR. THRESHOLDS: STANDARD = 1/2" MAX. AT EXT. SLIDING DOORS = 3/4”MAX., ADA HARDWARE = 34”MIN. TO 48”MAX. 5. DRINKING FOUNTAINS & EWC'S (TO SPOUT): STANDARD = 38”MIN., 43" MAX. ADA =36" MAX. (27" MIN. CLEAR KNEE SPACE) 6. COUNTERTOPS (TO SINK RIM/ COUNTERTOP): ADA = 28”MIN. TO 34" MAX. 7. WATER CLOSETS (TO TOP OF SEAT): STANDARD = 14”TO 15". ADA (TO TOP OF SEAT) = 17" TO 19”. ADA FLUSH CONTROLS = 44" MAX. 8. URINALS (TO RIM): STANDARD = 24" MAX. ADA =17" MAX. ADA FLUSH CONTROLS = 44" MAX. 9. LAVATORIES (TO SINK RIM/ COUNTERTOP): STANDARD = 36" MAX. ADA = 34" MAX. (29" MIN. CLEAR KNEE SPACE) 10. MIRRORS (TO B.O. REFLECTIVE SURFACE): STANDARD = VARIES. ADA = 40" MAX. 11. GRAB BARS -ADA (TO TOP OF BAR): WATER CLOSETS = 33”MIN. TO 36" MAX. SHOWERS = 33”MIN. TO 36" MAX. (FROM B.O.SHOWER). BATHTUBS: TOP BAR = 33”MIN. TO 36" MAX. BOT. BAR = 9”ABOVE T.O. TUB 12. SHOWER HEADS (FROM FLOOR TO HEAD): STANDARD = 72" TO 84”. ADA = SPRAY UNIT W/ HOSE 60”LONG MIN. ADA = FIXED SHOWER HEAD = 48”AFF. 13. SHOWER CONTROLS (TO CONTROL AREA): STANDARD = 48”MAX. (TO TOP). ADA = 38" MIN. TO 48" MAX. 14. SHOWER ROD (FROM FLOOR TO C.L.): STANDARD = 78" MAX. 15. TOILET ROOM PARTITIONS: TOILETS = 12" TO BOT. & 70”TO TOP. URINALS = 18" TO BOT. & 60”TO TOP 16. TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS (TO C.L. OF OUTLET): STANDARD = 24". ADA = 19”MIN. TO 24" MAX. 17. WALL MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSERS (TO C. L. OF PUSH BUTTON): STANDARD = 40". ADA = VARIES. RE: OBSTRUCTED AND UNOBSTRUCTED REACH RANGES. ADA SIDE REACH = 46”MAX. ABOVE SINK INCOUNTER. 18. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER/ WASTE RECEPTACLE (TO TOWEL SLOT): STANDARD = 40" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 19. WARM AIR HAND DRYER (TO PUSH SWITCH): STANDARD = 44" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 20. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER (TO C.L. OF COIN SLOT): STANDARD = 40" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 21. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL (TO TOP OF UNIT): STANDARD = 28" MAX. ADA = 19”MIN. TO 24" MAX. (TO OPNG.) 22. TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSERS (TO OPNG.): STANDARD = 40" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 23. SHELVES: ADA = 48" MAX. 24. COAT HOOKS: STANDARD = 68". ADA = 48" MAX. 25. CHALKBOARDS, TACKBOARDS,& MARKERBOARDS: STANDARD = 32" TO 39” (TO B.O. BOARD OR CHALKTRAY). STANDARD = 80”(RECOMMENDED, TO T.O. BOARD) 26. THERMOSTATS & CONTROL DEVICES (TO TOP): ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. 27. LIGHT SWITCHES & CARD READERS (TO C.L.): LOCATE 6”FROM DOOR JAMB. ADA = 48”MAX. 28. CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES – ELECTRICAL/ TELEPHONE/ DATA (TO C.L.): STANDARD = 18". ADA = 15”MIN. 29. EXIT LIGHTS -WALL MOUNTED: 2" MIN. BELOW CEILING. 2”MIN. ABOVE DOOR FRAME. EQUAL SPACE FROM CEILING TO TOP OF FRAME 30. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (TO TOP, U.N.O.): GROSS WT. 40 LBS. OR LESS = 60" MAX. GROSS WT. MORE THAN 40 LBS. = 42" MAX. ADA = 40" MAX. (B.O. CABINET) 31. FIRE ALARM PULL STATIONS (TO LEVER): STANDARD = 48" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. ADA SIDE REACH = 48” MAX. 32. SMOKE AND/OR HEAT DETECTORS: STANDARD = CEILING HEIGHT 33. HORN/ SPEAKER/ VISUAL SIGNALS: STANDARD = 80”AFF. OR 6”BELOW CEILING -WHICHEVER IS LOWER. 34. ROOM SIGNAGE (TO C.L.): STANDARD = 60” HIGH AFF. & WITHIN 18”OF LATCH SIDE OF DOOR GENERAL NOTES ADA GUIDELINES SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G003 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width to height ratio of between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke -width to height ratio between 1:5 & 1:10. Letters and numbers shall be raised 1/32" upper case, sans serif or simple serif type and shall be accompanied with grade 2 Braille, raised characters shall be at least 5/8" high, but no higher than 2". Detail 16.2Detail 16.1 International symbol of Accessibility Detail 16.3 Light switch, Thermostats, etc... Convenience Outlets, Data, Tele, etc... 4' - 6 " ( S I D E ) Note: This signage applies to all code compliant signage requirements including by not limited to rooms of the following type: mech rooms, sprinkler riser room, fire detection control rooms. 1' - 0" 1' - 6 " NE STAIR NO ROOF ACCESS 1 B3 THROUGH 17 MI N 1 1 / 2 " MI N 1" 5" M I N MI N 1" *NOTES: 1) INFORMATION ON SIGN TO BE SPECIFIC FOR EACH INSTALLATION LOCATION. INFORMATION SHOWN IN DETAIL IS FOR EXAMPLE ONLY. 2) ALL CHARACTERS TO BE UPPER-CASE. 3) CHARACTERS AND BACKGROUND SHALL HAVE NON-GLARE FINISH. 4) CHARACTERS SHALL CONTRAST WITH BACKGROUND. 5) ALL STAIRWAY IDENTIFICATION SIGNS TO BE MADE OF SELF- LUMINOUS AND/OR PHOTOLUMINESCENT MATERIALS EXCEPT AT RESIDENTIAL (R-2) STAIRS #1 & 2. 5' - 0 " A F F EXIT DISCHARGE THIS LEVEL STAIR ID AVAILABILITY OF ROOF ACCESS FLOOR LEVEL TOP & BOTTOM TERMINUS LEVEL OF AND DIRECTION TO EXIT DISCHARGE MI N 1" 6" AS R E Q EXIT *NOTES: 1) TACTILE EXIT SIGNS TO BE PROVIDED AT ALL EXIT STAIRWAYS, EXIT RAMPS, EXIT PASSAGEWAYS AND EXIT DISCHARGES. 2) ALL CHARACTERS TO BE UPPER-CASE. 3) CHARACTERS AND BACKGROUND SHALL HAVE NON-GLARE FINISH. 4) CHARACTERS SHALL CONTRAST WITH BACKGROUND. 5) CHARACTERS SHALL BE RAISED 1/32" MINIMUM ABOVE THEIR BACKGROUND. 6) ALL FLOOR LEVEL SIGNS SHALL COMPLY WITH ICC A117.1. 7) VERIFY REQUIRED SIGN LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT IN SUBMITTAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION. REFER TO GL (LIFE SAFETY SHEETS FOR EXIT AND EXIT STAIR LOCATIONS. 48 " M I N AF F MI N 3/ 8 " MI N 3/ 8 " MI N 3/ 8 " GRADE II BRAILLE ON LATCH SIDE 9" MIN TO DOOR EDGE DOOR FRAME 60 " M A X AF F 6" AS R E Q LEVEL 2 *NOTES: 1) INFORMATION ON SIGN TO BE SPECIFIC FOR EACH INSTALLATION LOCATION. INFORMATION SHOWN IN DETAIL IS FOR EXAMPLE ONLY. 2) ALL CHARACTERS TO BE UPPER-CASE. 3) CHARACTERS AND BACKGROUND SHALL HAVE NON-GLARE FINISH. 4) CHARACTERS SHALL CONTRAST WITH BACKGROUND. 5) CHARACTERS SHALL BE RAISED 1/32" MINIMUM ABOVE THEIR BACKGROUND. 6) ALL FLOOR LEVEL SIGNS SHALL COMPLY WITH ICC A117.1. 48 " M I N AF F FLOOR LEVEL MI N 3/ 8 " MI N 3/ 8 " MI N 3/ 8 " BRAILLE ON LATCH SIDE 9" MIN TO DOOR EDGE DOOR FRAME 60 " M A X AF F 1 1/2" O.D. (SS OR CHROME) GRAB BAR SUPPORTS 250 LBS FORCE (TYP.) TO T . O . B A R 2' - 9 " T O 3 ' - 0 " B. O . O P E N I N G 1' - 6 " M I N . WATER CLOSET FLUSH HANDLES SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE TRANSFER SIDE OF THE STOOL 2' - 0" MIN. MIN. 1' - 0" TO B . O . B A R 39 " T O 4 1 " 1' - 6 " M I N . 1' - 6" MAX. 1' - 4" MIN. VERTICAL GRAB BAR 18" MIN DISPENSER 1 1/2" O.D. ( SS OR CHROME ) GRAB BAR SUPPORTS 250 LBS FORCE (TYP.) 3' - 6" MIN.1' - 0" MAX. TO T . O . B A R 2' - 9 " T O 3 ' - 0 " 1 1/2" T. O . O P E N I N G 4' - 0 " M A X . DISPENSER 39" TO 41" MI N . 1' - 6 " TO B . O . B A R 39 " T O 4 1 " 1 1 / 2 " 7" TO 9" B. O . O P E N I N G 1' - 6 " M I N . VERTICAL GRAB BAR 18" MIN. 4' - 6" MIN. MAX. 3' - 0" 2'-0" MIN. 3'-0" MAX. 1' - 5 " TOILET PARTITION 1 1/2" O.D. (SS OR CHROME) GRAB BAR SUPPORTS 250 LBS FORCE (TYP.) 2' - 8 " C L E A R 3' - 0 " M I N . 4' - 1 1 " F O R F L O O R M T D . W . C . 4' - 8 " F O R W A L L M T D . W . C . 5' - 0" CLEAR 1 - 5".2' - 0" MA X . 1' - 0 " 3' - 6 " M I N . 4' - 6 " M I N . VERTICAL GRAB BAR 18" MIN. 3" CLEAR FLOOR SPACE 1 1/2" O.D. (SS OR CHROME) GRAB BAR SUPPORTS 250 LBS FORCE (TYP.) 4' - 1 1 " F O R F L O O R M T D . W . C . 4' - 8 " F O R W A L L H U N G W . C . 5' - 0" 1' - 5". VERTICAL GRAB BAR 18" MIN. NOTE: PARTITION DOOR IS TO BE LOCATED OPPOSITE OF W.C. LOCATION INSTALL @ 1' - 5" CODE: 1' - 4" MIN. / 1' - 6" MAX. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL TOILET PAPER DISPENSER 1' - 7 " M I N . SOAP DISPENSER ( 4" MAX. PROJ. ) MIRROR PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER ( 4" MAX. PROJ. )3' - 4 " M A X . 4' - 0 " M A X . 4' - 0 " M A X . TO B O T T O M O F RE F L E C T I V E SU R F A C E 3' - 1 1 1 / 8 " SE E N O T E # 1 7 6' - 2 " M I N . T O T O P O F RE F L E C T I V E S U R F A C E U . N . O . CLEAR FLOOR SPACE 11" MIN. 9" M I N . 2' - 3 " M I N . 2' - 1" MAX. 1' - 5" MIN. TO P O F S I N K R I M O R C O U N T E R 2' - 1 0 " M A X T O H I G H E R O F 2' - 6" MIN. 4' - 0 " M I N . 2' - 1 ' M A X . 1' - 5 " M I N . PLAN SECTION 6" MAX. 8" MIN. LINE OF WHEELCHAIR LIGHT SWITCH 4' - 0 " M A X . MAX. 1' - 0" 2" THERMOSTAT 1' - 3 " M I N . RECEPTACLE CENTERLINE OF CABINET HANDLE OR CENTERLINE OF F.E. HANDEL IF HUNG INSIDE CABINET 4' - 0 " M A X . SEMI-RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET 1 1 / 2 " M I N . 1 1/4" TO 2" 4 1/2" MAX. 1 1/2" MIN. 2X F.R. WOOD BLOCKING AT PERIMETER OF ACCESSORY SEMI-RECESSED F.E.C./ TOILET ACCESSORY PER SCHEDULE (NON-RATED WALLS) SURFACE MOUNTED TOILET ACCESSORY PER SCHEDULE 2"X10" F.R. WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 4" MAX. HANDRAIL OR GRAB BAR 4" MAXIMUM 2"X10" F.R. WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 2X F.R. WOOD BLOCKING AT PERIMETER OF ACCESSORY SEMI-RECESSED F.E.C./ TOILET ACCESSORY PER SCHEDULE 4" MAX. AT RECESS OPENINGS IN FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION ONLY. EXTEND GYP. BOARD CONTINUOUSLY ALONG RECESS AS INDICATED BY DASHED LINE 1. NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MEASURED FROM FLOOR, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 2. ADA UNOBSTRUCTED REACH RANGES: ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 3. ELEVATORS: STANDARD CALL BUTTONS: 35”TO 48”TO C.L. & PROTRUDE 1”MAX. ADA CALL BUTTONS: 42”TO C.L. (TYP.) & 48”MAX. (3/4”SMALLEST DIM.). ADA VISIBLE SIGNALS: 72”MIN. TO C.L. (2 1/2”SMALLEST DIM.). TACTILE SIGNAL ON HOISTWAY: 60”TO BASE OF CHARACTERS W/ TACTILE STAR & 2”HIGH CHARACTERS. 4. DOOR HARDWARE (TO CENTER OF HARDWARE): STANDARD MOUNTING HEIGHTS: PUSH PLATES = 42", PULL HANDLES = 42", KNOBS/ LEVERS = 40", PANIC EXIT = 42" CENTERLINE OF BAR, KICKPLATES: WIDTH = DOOR WIDTH MINUS 2”, CENTER, HEIGHT = 16”FROM B.O. DOOR. THRESHOLDS: STANDARD = 1/2" MAX. AT EXT. SLIDING DOORS = 3/4”MAX., ADA HARDWARE = 34”MIN. TO 48”MAX. 5. DRINKING FOUNTAINS & EWC'S (TO SPOUT): STANDARD = 38”MIN., 43" MAX. ADA =36" MAX. (27" MIN. CLEAR KNEE SPACE) 6. COUNTERTOPS (TO SINK RIM/ COUNTERTOP): ADA = 28”MIN. TO 34" MAX. 7. WATER CLOSETS (TO TOP OF SEAT): STANDARD = 14”TO 15". ADA (TO TOP OF SEAT) = 17" TO 19”. ADA FLUSH CONTROLS = 44" MAX. 8. URINALS (TO RIM): STANDARD = 24" MAX. ADA =17" MAX. ADA FLUSH CONTROLS = 44" MAX. 9. LAVATORIES (TO SINK RIM/ COUNTERTOP): STANDARD = 36" MAX. ADA = 34" MAX. (29" MIN. CLEAR KNEE SPACE) 10. MIRRORS (TO B.O. REFLECTIVE SURFACE): STANDARD = VARIES. ADA = 40" MAX. 11. GRAB BARS -ADA (TO TOP OF BAR): WATER CLOSETS = 33”MIN. TO 36" MAX. SHOWERS = 33”MIN. TO 36" MAX. (FROM B.O.SHOWER). BATHTUBS: TOP BAR = 33”MIN. TO 36" MAX. BOT. BAR = 9”ABOVE T.O. TUB 12. SHOWER HEADS (FROM FLOOR TO HEAD): STANDARD = 72" TO 84”. ADA = SPRAY UNIT W/ HOSE 60”LONG MIN. ADA = FIXED SHOWER HEAD = 48”AFF. 13. SHOWER CONTROLS (TO CONTROL AREA): STANDARD = 48”MAX. (TO TOP). ADA = 38" MIN. TO 48" MAX. 14. SHOWER ROD (FROM FLOOR TO C.L.): STANDARD = 78" MAX. 15. TOILET ROOM PARTITIONS: TOILETS = 12" TO BOT. & 70”TO TOP. URINALS = 18" TO BOT. & 60”TO TOP 16. TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS (TO C.L. OF OUTLET): STANDARD = 24". ADA = 19”MIN. TO 24" MAX. 17. WALL MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSERS (TO C. L. OF PUSH BUTTON): STANDARD = 40". ADA = VARIES. RE: OBSTRUCTED AND UNOBSTRUCTED REACH RANGES. ADA SIDE REACH = 46”MAX. ABOVE SINK INCOUNTER. 18. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER/ WASTE RECEPTACLE (TO TOWEL SLOT): STANDARD = 40" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 19. WARM AIR HAND DRYER (TO PUSH SWITCH): STANDARD = 44" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 20. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER (TO C.L. OF COIN SLOT): STANDARD = 40" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 21. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL (TO TOP OF UNIT): STANDARD = 28" MAX. ADA = 19”MIN. TO 24" MAX. (TO OPNG.) 22. TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSERS (TO OPNG.): STANDARD = 40" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. & 15”MIN. 23. SHELVES: ADA = 48" MAX. 24. COAT HOOKS: STANDARD = 68". ADA = 48" MAX. 25. CHALKBOARDS, TACKBOARDS,& MARKERBOARDS: STANDARD = 32" TO 39” (TO B.O. BOARD OR CHALKTRAY). STANDARD = 80”(RECOMMENDED, TO T.O. BOARD) 26. THERMOSTATS & CONTROL DEVICES (TO TOP): ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. ADA SIDE REACH = 48”MAX. 27. LIGHT SWITCHES & CARD READERS (TO C.L.): LOCATE 6”FROM DOOR JAMB. ADA = 48”MAX. 28. CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES – ELECTRICAL/ TELEPHONE/ DATA (TO C.L.): STANDARD = 18". ADA = 15”MIN. 29. EXIT LIGHTS -WALL MOUNTED: 2" MIN. BELOW CEILING. 2”MIN. ABOVE DOOR FRAME. EQUAL SPACE FROM CEILING TO TOP OF FRAME 30. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (TO TOP, U.N.O.): GROSS WT. 40 LBS. OR LESS = 60" MAX. GROSS WT. MORE THAN 40 LBS. = 42" MAX. ADA = 40" MAX. (B.O. CABINET) 31. FIRE ALARM PULL STATIONS (TO LEVER): STANDARD = 48" MAX. ADA FORWARD REACH = 48”MAX. ADA SIDE REACH = 48” MAX. 32. SMOKE AND/OR HEAT DETECTORS: STANDARD = CEILING HEIGHT 33. HORN/ SPEAKER/ VISUAL SIGNALS: STANDARD = 80”AFF. OR 6”BELOW CEILING -WHICHEVER IS LOWER. 34. ROOM SIGNAGE (TO C.L.): STANDARD = 60” HIGH AFF. & WITHIN 18”OF LATCH SIDE OF DOOR GENERAL NOTES ADA GUIDELINES SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G004 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 1/4" = 1'-0"14 ADA DETAIL SIGNAGE 3" = 1'-0"11 STAIRWAY IDENTIFICATION SIGN 3" = 1'-0"13 TACTILE EXIT SIGN 3" = 1'-0"12 STAIRWAY FLOOR LEVEL SIGN 1/2" = 1'-0"7 WC ELEVATION 1/2" = 1'-0"8 WC SECTION 1/2" = 1'-0"9 ACCESSIBLE TOILET STALL 1/2" = 1'-0"10 ACCESSIBLE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE 1/2" = 1'-0"5 TOILET ACCESSORIES 1/2" = 1'-0"6 SINK IN COUNTER CLEARANCES 1/2" = 1'-0"1 SWITCH @ DOOR 1/2" = 1'-0"2 FE CABINET 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 HANDRAIL CLEARANCES 3/4" = 1'-0"4 STANDARD BLOCKING DETAILS APPLICABLE CODES: APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE: APPLICABLE PLUMBING CODE: APPLICABLE MECHANICAL CODE: APPLICABLE ELECTRICAL CODE: APPLICABLE FIRE CODE: APPLICABLE FIRE / LIFE SAFETY CODE: APPLICABLE ENERGY CODE: APPLICABLE ACCESSIBILITY CODE: 2021 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE - W/ LOCAL AMENDMENTS 2021 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE - W/ LOCAL AMENDMENTS 2021 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE - W/ LOCAL AMENDMENTS 2020 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE - W/ LOCAL AMENDMENTS 2021 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE - W/ LOCAL AMENDMENTS (INCLUDING REFERENCED NFPA CODE) 2015 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE 2012 TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY CODE CODE INFORMATION: PROJECT: COOK CHILDREN'S CLINIC LOCATION: GRAPEVINE, TX ARCHITECT: MODUS ARCHITECTURE, PLLC 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TX 75204 ISSUE (TABLE/ SECTION/ REFERENCE): BUILDING/PROJECT USE (IBC SECTION 308): CONSTRUCTION TYPE (IBC TABLE 503 & 601): OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION (IBC SECTION 304.1): REQUIREMENT: BUSINESS TYPE V-B (ASSUMED), SPRINKLERED B - BUSINESS (AMBULATORY AND OUTPATIENT CASE < 24 HOURS) FIRE RESISTIVE REQUIREMENTS (TABLE/ SECTION/ REFERENCE): EXTERIOR BEARING WALLS (IBC TABLE 601) EXTERIOR OPENINGS (IBC TABLE 705.8) EXTERIOR NON-BEARING WALLS (IBC TABLE 602) INTERIOR BEARING WALLS (IBC TABLE 601) INTERIOR NON-BEARING WALLS (IBC TABLE 601) STRUCTURAL FRAME (IBC TABLE 601) STRUCTURAL FRAME FOR SUPPORTING SHAFTS (IBC TABLE 701.3.10) FLOOR CONSTRUCTION (IBC TABLE 601) ROOF (TABLE 601) CORRIDORS (IBC TABLE 1018.1) SHAFT WALLS (IBC TABLE 708.4) INTERIOR EXIT STAIRWAYS (IBC SECTION 1022.2) OCCUPANCY SEPARATION B/E (IBC TABLE 508.4) REQUIREMENTS CONSTRUCTION TYPE VB: 0 HRS NO LIMIT 0 HRS 0 HRS 0 HRS 0 HRS 0 HRS 0 HRS 0 HRS 0 HRS 0 HRS 0 HRS 0 HRS 1 TENANT A: CODE INFORMATION REQUIREMENT FLOOR AREA (GROSS) OCCUPANT LOAD EXITS REQUIRED EXITS PROVIDED EGRESS WIDTH REQUIRED EGRESS WIDTH PROVIDED EXIT TRAVEL DISTANCE MAX EXIT TRAVEL DISTANCE (IBC 1017.2) 6,656 SF 247 SF STORAGE (300 OLF) = 1 OCCUPANTS 5,709 SF BUSINESS (150 GROSS) = 43 OCCUPANTS 700 SF WAITING (15 GROSS) = 47 OCCUPANTS TOTAL = 91 OCCUPANTS 2 3 91*0.2 (SPRINKLED) = 18.2" WIDTH (32" MIN.) 2 DOORS AT 32" = 64" PROVIDED REFER TO TABLES ON G110 300' -0" PLUMBING FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS 2021 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE: TABLE 403.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES WATER CLOSETS: LAVATORIES: DRINKING FOUNTAINS: SERVICE SINK: REQUIRED 3 3 1 1 ISSUE PROVIDED 4 4 1 1 F.E.C. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET 1 HOUR RATED WALL EXIT SIGN AED AED CABINET LIFE SAFETY LEGEND OCCUPANCY LEGEND BUSINESS ACCESSORY STORAGE WAITING AREA 1 A B C 5709 SF BUSINESS 700 SF WAITING AREA 119 SF STORAGE 40 SF STORAGE N.I.C. N.I.C. F.E.C. F.E.C. EXAM 12EXAM 13EXAM 14 EXAM 11 EXAM 10 EXAM 09 EXAM 08 IT/ELEC EXAM 07 EXAM 06 EXAM 03EXAM 02EXAM 01 STAFF TLT BREAKROOM MA STATION EXAM 05 EXAM 04 EXAM 15 NURSING WAITING LAB RECEPTION SHARED OFFICEVITALS TLT TLT 88 SF STORAGE TLT RISER ROOM EVSAE D B AC F. E . C . F. E . C . CURRENTLY UNOCCUPIED FUTURE TYPE "B" OCCUPANCY CURRENTLY UNOCCUPIED FUTURE TYPE "B" OCCUPANCY 1 1 1 1 1. THIS PLAN IS PROVIDED FOR THE CONVENIENCE OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL AND FIRE MARSHAL. IT DOCUMENTS THE MAJOR LIFE SAFETY FEATURES OF THE PROJECT 2. REFERENCE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF FIRE DAMPER REQUIREMENTS IN DUCTWORK 3. REFERENCE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 4. REFERENCE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXIT LIGHT LOCATIONS 5. REFERENCE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 6. SQUARE FOOTAGE INDICATED ON THE LIFE SAFETY PLAN RELATES TO OCCUPANT LOAD ONLY AND SHALL NOT BE USED FOR ANY OTHER PURPOSE 7. REFER TO G001 FOR CODE COMPLIANCE GENERAL NOTES 8. CORRIDORS NOT CONSIDERED IN OCCUPANCY CALCULATIONS 9. TACTILE EXIT SIGNS ARE TO BE PROVIDED ADJACENT TO EACH DOOR TO AN EXIT STAIRWAY OR RAMP, AN EXIT PASSAGEWAY AND THE EXIT DISCHARGE 10. EXISTING WALLS SHOWN WITH NEW LIFE SAFETY RATINGS ARE TO BE UPGRADED TO THE NEW RATING. THE UPGRADING INCLUDES PROTECTING ALL OPENINGS IN THE PARTITION 11. DOORS IN CORRIDOR PARTITIONS SHALL BE INSTALLED TO RESIST THE PASSAGE OF SMOKE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 12. VERIFY THAT ALL EXISTING DOORS IN RATED WALLS ARE LABELED WITH THE APPROPRIATE MARK 13. VERIFY THAT ALL EXISTING WALLS THAT ARE LABELED AS FIRE RATED OR SMOKE TIGHT MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LABELING GENERAL NOTES LIFE SAFETY SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G110 OVERALL LIFE SAFETY PLAN PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 EGRESS (MAXIMUM TRAVEL DISTANCE) TYPE DISTANCE EGRESS PATH A 109' - 1" EGRESS PATH B 123' - 9" EGRESS PATH C 76' - 11" EGRESS (COMMON PATH OF TRAVEL) TYPE DISTANCE EGRESS PATH A 77' - 4" EGRESS PATH B 60' - 3" EGRESS PATH C 42' - 11" PLAN NORTH TRUE NORTH 3/16" = 1'-0"1 LIFE SAFETY PLAN 1 ADDENDUM 01 02.17.25 1 FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION SECTION 012100 ALLOWANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Cash allowances. B. Contingency allowance. C. Inspecting and testing allowances. D. Payment and modification procedures relating to allowances. 1. CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts, less cost of delivery to site, less applicable taxes. B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances: Product delivery to site and handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage; and labor for installation and finishing. C. Architect Responsibilities: 1. Consult with Contractor for consideration and selection of products, suppliers, and installers. 2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor. 3. Prepare Change Order. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist Architect in selection of products, suppliers, and installers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and installer. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order. 2. CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance. B. Funds will be drawn from the Contingency Allowance only by Change Order. C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 3. INSPECTING AND TESTING ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Inspecting and Testing Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspecting or testing agency; execution of inspecting and tests; and reporting results. B. Costs Not Included in the Inspecting and Testing Allowances: 1. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency. 2. Costs of testing services used by Contractor separate from Contract Document requirements. 3. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect. C. Payment Procedures: 1. Submit one copy of the inspecting or testing firm's invoice with next application for payment. 2. Pay invoice on approval by Architect. D. Differences in cost will be adjusted by Change Order. SECTION 008000 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1. SUPPLEMENTS A. The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, Seventeenth Edition, 2017. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provision of the Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. 2. REFERENCE TO DIVISION 01 A. With regard to provisions of General Conditions related to project administrative or work-related requirements of the Contract, some of those paragraphs are modified or deleted from General Conditions, and are specified in Division 01, "General Requirements" of the Specifications. ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS Add the following new paragraphs: 1.1.9 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS 1.1.9.1 The term "Product" as used in these Contract Documents includes materials, systems, and equipment. 1.1.9.2 The term "provide" as used in this Project Manual means to furnish and install. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Add the following new subparagraphs: 1.2.4 The inter-relation of the Project Manual, the Drawings and the schedules is as follows: The Project Manual determines the quality, nature and setting of the several materials; the Drawings establish the quantities, dimensions and details; and the schedules give the location. The documents are to be considered as one and whatever is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. 1.2.5 Should the drawings disagree in themselves, or with the Project Manual, or if proprietary information disagrees with performance requirements in either the Drawings or the Project Manual, the better quality or greater quantity of the Work or materials shall be estimated upon, and unless otherwise ordered by the Architect in writing, shall be performed or furnished. Should discrepancies or doubt occur, do not proceed with the Work or estimate without clarification from the Architect. Contractor shall request clarification in sufficient time to avoid delays and/or any adjustments in the contract sum. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR Add following sentences to subparagraph 3.2.2: 3.2.2.1 If a dimensional discrepancy exists, Contractor shall take field measurements required for proper fabrication and installation of work. Upon commencement of any item of work, Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions related to such item of Work and shall make any corrections necessary to make work properly fit at no additional cost to Owner. 3.2.2.2 Before ordering any material or doing any work, Contractor shall verify dimensions and check conditions in order to assure himself that they properly reflect those on the Drawings. Any inconsistency shall be brought to attention of the Architect. In the event that discrepancies occur between ordered material and actual conditions, of which Architect was not notified beforehand, costs to correct such discrepancies shall be borne by Contractor. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Supplement as provided in Division 01. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Add the following new paragraph: 3.4.4 Within 15 days after the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements of the Specifications, Division 01. Refer to Division 01 for supplemental information. 3.5 WARRANTY Supplement as provided in Division 01. 3.8 ALLOWANCES Supplement as provided in Division 01. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES Supplement as provided in Division 01. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE Supplement as provided in Division 01. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Supplement as provided in Division 01, Section 011000, Summary. 3.13 USE OF SITE Supplement as provided in Division 01. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING Supplement as provided in Division 01. 3.15 CLEANING UP Supplement as provided in Division 01. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Add the following new paragraph 6.1.5 Coordinated construction work under this Contract includes, but is not limited to, providing concealed blocking as noted for attachment of separate contract items in locations necessary for the actual items to be installed. Provide proper dimensional coordination of separate contract supplied items for general construction work and trim that is to meet and/or adjoin Furniture, Fixtures, Equipment and Accessories. 6.1.6 It is a requirement of the Contractor’s work schedule to provide the cooperation, coordination and exchange of information necessary for a timely execution of separate contract work. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL Supplement as provided in Division1. Add the following new paragraphs: 7.1.4 Except as provided in this article, no oral statement, or direction of Architect or Owner shall be treated as a Change Order or entitle Contractor to an adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 7.1.5 Unit prices shall be inclusive of all costs including mark-up for overhead and profit and shall be applied to units of measure as defined in the Contract Documents for each category of Work. Contractor shall identify overhead and profit amounts for each unit price. 7.1.6 The allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule: 7.1.6.1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, 15 percent of the cost. 7.1.6.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractor, 10 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor. 7.1.6.3 For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that Subcontractor’s or Sub-subcontractor’s own forces, 15 percent of the cost. 7.1.6.4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor’s Sub-subcontractors, 10 percent of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor. 7.1.6.5 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $2,000.00 be approved without such itemization. ARTICLE 8 - TIME 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME Add the following new paragraphs 8.3.4 Apart from extension of time, no payment or claim for damages shall be made to Contractor as compensation for damages for any ordinary delays or hindrances from any cause whatsoever in the progress of the Work, notwithstanding whether such delay be avoidable or unavoidable. 8.3.5 In order to claim an inclement weather delay day, Contractor must: 8.3.5.1 Document, in writing, that the weather on the particular day was of such nature (rain, wind, snow, ice, and subsequent resultant effects) that it significantly impacted its ability to make progress on critical path work items. Utilize NOAA weather data from a nearby site as the back-up for all claims. 8.3.5.2 Submit such delay claims on a weekly basis, not more than 7 days following the last day of occurrence. 8.3.5.3 Summarize the number of days claimed for the entire month accompanying each month’s application for payment. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Supplement as provided in Division 01. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Supplement as provided in Division 01. Add the following new subparagraph: 9.3.4 Unless otherwise stated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Owner will retain, until Final Payment, 10 percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments, payable 30 days after Substantial Completion and/or satisfactory ev idence to the owner that all payments, bills, and claims have been paid. Add following Sub-subparagraphs: 9.3.4 Monthly Applications for Payment shall include waivers of liens for all work included in previous months' application for payment. Waiver of Liens for subcontractors and materialmen shall be total amount paid prior to previous months' application for payment. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION Add following Sub-subparagraph 9.5.1.8 to Subparagraph 9.5.1: 9.5.1.8 Failure to submit written plan indicating action by Contractor to regain time schedule for completion of Work within Contract Time. 9.5.1.9 Failure to keep record documents current. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Supplement as provided in Division 01. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Add the following new paragraph 9.10.2.1 In addition to the items listed in 9.10.2, the Contractor shall deliver 2 hard copies and 2 electronic copies (PDF format on thumb drive) sets of the following items to the Owner before final payment will be made: 1. Other close-out submittals as specified in Division 01. 2. Project record documents as specified in Division 01. 3. Operations and maintenance data as specified in Division 01. 4. All warranties as required on specific products or portions of the Work, in format outlined in Division 01. 5. Spare parts, overages, and maintenance materials as outlined in Division 01 and described in the various technical sections. 6. Certificates of occupancy. 7. Copies of all inspection tags from authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS Refer to Owner-Contractor Agreement ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Supplement as provided in Division 01, Section 014000, Quality Requirements. SECTION 007000 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, APPLY TO THIS SECTION. 2. GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, 2017 edition, Articles 1 through 15 inclusive, is a part of this Contract, and is available for review from the Architect. The General Conditions and all modifications listed in Section 008000 shall apply to all various subcontracts and sub-subcontractors. B. Refer to Document 008000 for Supplementary Conditions. C. Should the general conditions or supplementary conditions be in conflict with the Owner Contractor agreement, the Owner-Contractor agreement shall govern. SECTION 012200 UNIT PRICES PART 1 GENERAL 1. SECTION INCLUDES A. List of unit prices, for use in preparing Bids. B. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to Work performed under a unit price payment method. C. Defect assessment and non-payment for rejected work. 2. COSTS INCLUDED A. Unit Prices included on the Bid Form shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. 3. UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantities indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements of actual Work will determine the payment amount. 4. MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Measurement methods delineated in the individual specification sections complement the criteria of this section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the individual specification section govern. B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. Measurements and quantities will be verified by Architect. C. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required. D. Measurement Devices: 1. Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable state Weights and Measures department within the past year. 2. Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate the conveying vehicle. 3. Metering Devices: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable state department within the past year. E. Measurement by Weight: Concrete reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by handbook or scale weight. F. Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness. G. Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. H. Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. I. Stipulated Price Measurement: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. J. Perform surveys required to determine quantities, including control surveys to establish measurement reference lines. Notify Architect prior to starting work. K. Contractor's Engineer Responsibilities: Sign surveyor's field notes or keep duplicate field notes, calculate and certify quantities for payment purposes. 5. PAYMENT A. Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities of Work that is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work and accepted by the Architect, multiplied by the unit price. B. Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products. 6. DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work, or portions of the Work, not complying with specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The defective Work may remain, but the unit price will be adjusted to a new unit price at the discretion of Architect. 2. The defective Work will be partially repaired to the instructions of the Architect, and the unit price will be adjusted to a new unit price at the discretion of Architect. C. The individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D. The authority of Architect to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment is final. C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.4 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Comply with reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.2 MOCK-UPS A. Apply finish materials to demonstrate the proposed range of materials, colors, and workmanship. B. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. C. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. D. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. E. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Architect. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-compliance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. F. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.5 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.6 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. References and standards C. Testing and inspection agencies and services. D. Control of installation. E. Mock-ups. F. Tolerances. G. Manufacturers' field services. H. Defect Assessment. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 014216 - Definitions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. C. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electronic document submittal service. B. Preconstruction meeting. C. Progress meetings. D. Construction progress schedule. E. Progress photographs. F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Submittal procedures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum bi-monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of work, with a general outline for remainder of work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.4 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days prior to submission of application for payment. B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files. C. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events: 1. Completion of site clearing. 2. Excavations in progress. 3. Foundations in progress and upon completion. 4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion. 5. Enclosure of building, upon completion. 6. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos. D. Views: 1. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until date of Substantial Completion. 2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required. 3. Provide factual presentation. 4. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field, and minimum distortion. E. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software. 1. Delivery Medium: Via email. 2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification. 3. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal. 4. Hard Copy: Printed hardcopy (grayscale) of PDF file and point of view sketch. 3.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. 3.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 3.7 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. A. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Requirements: 1. Transmit using approved form. 2. Sequentially identify each item. For revised submittals use original number and a sequential numerical suffix. 3. Identify: Project; Contractor; subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number; and specification section number and article/paragraph, as appropriate on each copy. 4. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. 5. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. 6. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. 7. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. 8. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. 9. Distribute reviewed submittals. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. 10. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 11. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized due to Contractor's failure to provide submittals in advance of the Work to permit processing or for submitting materials which do not meet minimum standards as indicated in the Specifications. 12. Manufacturer's product data sheets listing multiple items must be clearly marked to indicate the specific material or product submitted for use in the Work 2.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Comply with requirements specified in this section. Substitutions shall be considered for comparable product(s) which have the indicated qualities or basis-of-design characteristics related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of the specified product(s). B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement. C. Substitutions will be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. D. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. E. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. A. Substitutions will not be considered at any time, when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request on form hereto attached, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit one PDF of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. Submit on form at the end of this Section. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 4. If substitution is not acceptable, Contractor will provide specified product (s). 3.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 017419. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations. E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Waste disposal requirements potentially affecting product selection, packaging and substitutions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Where other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 2. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 3. Result in less construction waste. See Section 017419 4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable. 5. Are made of recycled materials. 2.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. SECTION - 024100 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2013. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCOPE A. Remove portions of existing buildings as indicated to perform overall scope of Work. B. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, recycling, and . 3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 017000. B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 4. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 5. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 6. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 7. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. E. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. F. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. G. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. H. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface. 3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified. 2. Remove items indicated on drawings. D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. E. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.5 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G130 SPECIFICATIONS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 C. Designation U-MC - Non-sag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, I, M, A, G, O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging Designation. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: NP-2 manufactured by Sonneborn. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35. D. Designation U-SL - Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, I, M, A, O; single component, chemical curing, non staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, self-leveling Designation. 1. Color: Color as selected. 2. Product: SL-2 manufactured by Sonneborn. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35. E. Designation S-GP - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: 795 manufactured by Dow Corning. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. F. Designation S-S - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grane NS, Class 25, Uses NG, A, G, M, O; single component, non-sagging, non-staining, sanitary. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: 786 manufactured by Dow Corning. 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 5. Pre-Formed Elastomeric Foam Seal (PF): Protectowrap Triple Guard energy Sill Sealer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining Designation, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. C. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. D. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919 and USG manual. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Pre-compressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Designation is Indicated: Designation S-GP. B. Control and Expansion Joints in Paving: Designation U-SL. C. Interior Wall Expansion Joints: Designation U-MC. D. Exterior Wall Expansion Joints: Designation S-GP. E. Control, Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between Masonry and Adjacent Work: Designation S-GP. F. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Designation S-GP. G. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work: Designation S-GP. H. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Designation S-GP. I. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Designation AL. J. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Designation U-SL. K. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls: Designation S-S. L. In STC-Rated Walls, Between Metal Stud Track/Runner and Adjacent Construction: Designation AL-A. M. Between Slab on Grade and Exterior Wall Sill Plates: Designation PF. N. Between Slab and Sill Receivers at Aluminum Storefront: Bituminous Mastic. SECTION 079005 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing at the juncture of all dis-similar materials. B. Pre-compressed foam sealers. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Samples: Submit one sample for each Designation and color of joint sealant required. Samples shall be installed in 1/2 inch wide joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: Submit reports from joint sealant manufacturer indicating: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. C. Do not apply sealants if ambient or substrate temperatures are below 40 degrees and rising. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective workmanship within a five-year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Correct defective materials for 5 years for urethane sealants and 20 years for silicone sealants. D. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.bostik-us.com/": www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones HYPERLINK "http://www.momentive.com/"): www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporati HYPERLINK "http://www.pecora.com/"on: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems HYPERLINK "http://www.buildingsystems.basf.com/": www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 5. Tremco Global Sealants HYPERLINK "http://www.tremcosealants.com/": www.tremcosealants.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.bostik-us.com/": www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporati HYPERLINK "http://www.pecora.com/"on: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems HYPERLINK "http://www.buildingsystems.basf.com/": www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C920): 1. Tremco Global Sealants HYPERLINK "http://www.tremcosealants.com/": www.tremcosealants.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.bostik-us.com/": www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporati HYPERLINK "http://www.pecora.com/"on: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems HYPERLINK "http://www.buildingsystems.basf.com/": www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Tremco Global Sealants HYPERLINK "http://www.tremcosealants.com/": www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: 1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: HYPERLINK "http://www.emseal.com/"www.emseal.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard: wwwh-b.com. 3. Dayton Superior Corporati HYPERLINK "http://www.daytonsuperior.com/"on: www.daytonsuperior.com. 4. Tremco Global Sealants HYPERLINK "http://www.tremcosealants.com/": www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SEALANTS A. Designation AL-A - Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning. 1. Product: BA-98 manufactured by Pecora. B. Designation AL - Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, O; single component, solvent curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: Sonolac manufactured by Sonneborn. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 25 to 50. 6. Applications: Use for: D. Foam Firestoppping: Single component silicone foam compound. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M Fire Protection Products HYPERLINK "http://www.3m.com/firestop": www.3m.com/firestop. b. Hilti, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.us.hilti.com/": www.us.hilti.com. c. Specified Technologies, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.stifirestop.com/": www.stifirestop.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. E. Fibered Compound Firestopping: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 1. Manufacturers: a. A/DFire Protection Systems Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.adfire.com/": www.adfire.com. b. USG HYPERLINK "http://www.usg.com/": www.usg.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. F. Fiber Firestopping: Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer forming airtight bond to opening. 1. Manufacturers: a. A/DFire Protection Systems Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.adfire.com/": www.adfire.com. b. Pecora Corporati HYPERLINK "http://www.pecora.com/"on: www.pecora.com. c. Thermafiber, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.thermafiber.com/": www.thermafiber.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. G. Firestop Devices - Wrap Type: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and sheet stainless steel jacket, intended to be installed after penetrating item has been installed. 1. Manufacturers: a. RectorSeal HYPERLINK "http://www.rectorseal.com/": www.rectorseal.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products HYPERLINK "http://www.3m.com/firestop": www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.us.hilti.com/": www.us.hilti.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.stifirestop.com/": www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. H. Intumescent Putty: Compound that expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 1. Manufacturers: a. RectorSeal HYPERLINK "http://www.rectorseal.com/": www.rectorseal.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products HYPERLINK "http://www.3m.com/firestop": www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.us.hilti.com/": www.us.hilti.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.stifirestop.com/": www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. I. Reusable Firestopping: Removable intumescent compressible shapes, pillows, or blocks specifically tested in removable configuration. 1. Manufacturers: A. RectorSeal HYPERLINK "http://www.rectorseal.com/": www.rectorseal.com. B. Hilti, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.us.hilti.com/": www.us.hilti.com. C. Nelson FireStop Products HYPERLINK "http://www.nelsonfirestop.com/": www.nelsonfirestop.com. D. Specified Technologies, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.stifirestop.com/": www.stifirestop.com. E. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. J. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. 1. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C. Install backing materials to prevent liquid material from leakage. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Install labeling required by code. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Testing Agency: Inspection agency employed and paid by Owner, will examine penetration firestopping in accordance with ASTM E2174, and ASTM E2393. B. Repair or replace penetration firestopping and joints at locations where inspection results indicate firestopping or joints do not meet specified requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. SECTION 078400 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies, and other openings indicated. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E2174 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Firestops; 2014b. B. ASTM E2393 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers; 2010a (Reapproved 2015). C. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. G. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in UL (FRD) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc- es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above substantiation exists. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. Trained by manufacturer. 2. Verification of minimum three years documented experience installing work of this type. 3. Verification of at least five satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type. 4. Licensed by local authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements of approved assembly. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of materials as required for tested firestopping assembly. B. Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required systems and ratings. C. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 1. Manufacturers: a. A/DFire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood casings and moldings. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2017. B. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program; current edition at www.awiqcp.org. C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2016). 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. 2. Provide instructions for attachment hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). 3. Include certification program label. D. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 6 inch long. E. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control programs. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project within the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this project. 2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B. Quality Certification: 1. Comply with AWI (QCP) woodwork association quality certification service/program in accordance with requirements for work specified in this section: www.awiqcp.org/#sle. 2. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade or grades specified. 3. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program. 4. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program. 5. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance with specified requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required by applicable code. C. Interior Woodwork Items: 1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Maple, prepare for transparent finish. 2. Stair Treads: Maple, prepare for transparent finish. 3. "Fin Element": Suspended maple boards as detailed, transparent finish. Refer to Section 055000 for turnbuckle hardware. 2.2 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Hardwood Lumber: Maple species, plain sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish. 2.3 FASTENINGS A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. B. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application, finishes as approved by Architect. C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of any species as specified in Section 061000. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer. C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring fire rating to concealed wood blocking. C. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material. D. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting. E. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 9 percent moisture content. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 2.7 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish. D. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent: a. System - 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed. b. Sheen: As scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. C. See Section 061000 for installation of recessed wood blocking. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade indicated. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES B. Preservative treated wood materials. C. Fire retardant treated wood materials. D. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. B. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2010 (Reapproved 2017). C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2017. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2017. E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. F. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2015. G. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and application instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc; SPIB (GR). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Other Applications: 1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C Plugged or better, Exterior grade. 2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better. 3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. B. Construction Adhesives: 1. Manufacturers: a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond Fast Set Polyurethane Construction Adhesive: HYPERLINK "http://www.titebond.com/#sle" www.titebond.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.5 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Manufacturers: a. Lonza Gro HYPERLINK "http://www.wolmanizedwood.com/#sle"up: www.wolmanizedwood.com/#sle. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.frtw.com/#sle": www.frtw.com/#sle. c. Koppers, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.koppersperformancechemicals.com/#sle": www.koppersperformancechemicals.com/#sle. d. Viance, LLC; D-Blaz HYPERLINK "http://www.treatedwood.com/#sle"e: www.treatedwood.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground. 3. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated . c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet. A. Preservative Treatment: 1. Manufacturers: a. Lonza Gro HYPERLINK "http://www.wolmanizedwood.com/#sle"up: www.wolmanizedwood.com/#sle. b. Koppers Performance Chemicals HYPERLINK "http://www.koppersperformancechemicals.com/#sle", Inc: www.koppersperformancechemicals.com/#sle. c. Viance, LLC; Preserve ACQ HYPERLINK "http://www.treatedwood.com/#sle": www.treatedwood.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber in Contact with Soil: AWPA U1, Use Category UC4A, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. a. Preservative for Field Application to Cut Surfaces: As recommended by manufacturer of factory treatment chemicals for brush-application in the field. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 1. INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.2 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. D. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Grab bars. 4. Towel and bath accessories. 5. Wall-mounted door stops. 6. Chalkboards and marker boards. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.5 CLEANING A. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. SECTION 064100 - ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2016). B. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program; current edition at www.awiqcp.org. C. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2015. D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. E. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet substrate and finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. 2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B. Quality Certification: 1. Comply with AWI (QCP) woodwork association quality certification service/program in accordance with requirements for work specified in this section: www.awiqcp.org/#sle. 2. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade or grades specified. 3. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program. 4. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program. 5. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance with specified requirements. 6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade. 2.2 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications. C. Provide specific types as indicated. 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as indicated, finish as indicated. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as indicated, finish as indicated. 3. Post-Formed Horizontal Surfaces: HGP, 0.039 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as indicated, finish as indicated. 4. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as indicated, finish as indicated. 5. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate. 2.3 COUNTERTOPS A. Countertops are specified in Section 123600. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed locations. E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. F. Grommets: Standard plastic, painted metal, or rubber grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface. 2.5 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Manufacturers: 1. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com/#sle. 2. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com/#sle. 3. Hafele america Co.: www.hafele.com/us/en/ 4. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com/#sle. C. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. D. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers. E. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish. F. Catches: Magnetic. G. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Full extension with overtravel. 2. Static Load Capacity: Extra Heavy Duty grade. 3. Mounting: Bottom mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. H. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish. I. Soft Close Adapter: Concealed, frame-mounted, screw-adjustable damper ; steel with polished finish. 2.6 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Provide UL (DIR) listed and approved identification on fire retardant treated material. B. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. E. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16 inches on center. F. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade indicated. B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. F. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt insulation in exterior wall and ceiling construction. B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2017a. B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2017. D. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2016a. E. ASTM E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies; 2017. F. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Behind Spandrel Glass: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board. B. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder. 2.2 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 5. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 13. 6. Facing: Unfaced. 7. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle. b. Johns Manville: www.jm.com/#sle. c. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Flexible Blanket Insulation: Thin profile insulation that complies with complex shapes, unfaced; flame spread index of 5 (five) and smoke development index of 10 (ten) or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 3. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Company: consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.2 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS A. Install rigid insulation directly to steel studs or exterior grade sheathing at 16 inches on center with manufacturer recommended mechanical fasteners, and tape joints with manufacturer's minimum 4 inch wide sealant tape; comply with ASTM E2357. B. Install boards horizontally on walls. 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Install in running bond pattern. 3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.3 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G131 SPECIFICATIONS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 3. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as referring to the latest edition of that standard: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series. 2. UL10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. ANSI/UL 294 - Access Control System Units. 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 5. ANSI/UL 437- Key Locks. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing, fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUTT HINGES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: a. Non-removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges, provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for all out-swinging lockable doors. 5. Manufacturers: a. McKinney (MK) - TA/T4A Series, 5-knuckle. 2.2 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder formats and types: 1. Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored or cylindrical lock cylinders with tailpieces as required to suit locks. 4. Tubular deadlocks and other auxiliary locks. 5. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 6. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard. C. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Field verify and key cylinders to match Owner's existing system. D. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). E. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. F. Key Registration List (Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. 2.3 MORTISE LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Provide ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed mortise locksets. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. 1. Manufacturers: a. ASSA ABLOY ACCENTRA, formerly known as Yale (YA) - 8800FL Series. b. dormakaba BEST (BE) - 45H Series. 2.4 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed cylindrical locksets. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. 1. Manufacturers: a. ASSA ABLOY ACCENTRA, formerly known as Yale (YA) 4700LN Series. B. Cylindrical Indicator Locksets, Grade 1 (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. 1. Provide locksets with functions and features as follows: a. Visual status indicators in rose, displaying bold visuals for vacant or occupied lock status. b. Meets ANSI/BHMA A156.41 for single motion egress. c. Meets UL and CUL Standard 10C Positive Pressure, Fire Test of Door Assemblies with levers that meet A117.1 Accessibility Code. d. Three-year limited warranty. 2. Manufacturers: a. ASSA ABLOY ACCENTRA, formerly known as Yale (YA) - YPL Series. 2.5 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. DHI TDH-007-20: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Push Plates and Door Pulls: When through-bolt fasteners are in the same location as a push plate, countersink the fasteners flush with the door face allowing the push plate to sit flat against the door. E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections “Closeout Procedures”. Produce project punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved submittals and verification hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. Include list of items to be completed and corrected, indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to be incomplete or rejected. 1. Organization of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective Action Lists organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images and Video Recordings. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. 1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products. 3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening. 4. At existing openings with new hardware the supplier shall field inspect existing conditions prior to the submittal stage to verify the specified hardware will work as required. Provide alternate solutions and proposals as needed. B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. YA - ASSA ABLOY ACCENTRA 3. HS - HES 4. RF - Rixson 5. RO - Rockwood 6. PE - Pemko 7. SU - Securitron 8. OT - Other 9. BE - BEST Locks & Closers Reference Door schedule sheet for Door hardware sets. D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Provide record documentation of as-built door hardware sets in digital format (.pdf, .docx, .xlsx, .csv) and as required in Division 01, Project Record Documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Certified Products: Where specified, products must maintain a current listing in the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Certified Products Directory (CPD). C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label indicating compliance with the referenced testing standards. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied according to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.7 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Warranty Period: Unless otherwise indicated, warranty shall be one year from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.6 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Standard Electric Strikes: Electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, for use on non-rated or fire rated openings. Strikes shall be of stainless steel construction tested to a minimum of 1500 pounds of static strength and 70 foot-pounds of dynamic strength with a minimum endurance of 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability, fail- secure unless otherwise specified. Where specified provide latchbolt and latchbolt strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike. 1. Manufacturers: a. HES (HS) - 1500/1600 Series. b. Von Duprin (VD) - 6200/6400 Series. B. Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty. 2.7 SURFACE DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Utility Grade): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, utility grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6. Closers to be rack and pinion type, cast aluminum case construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide closer standard packed for regular, top-jamb, and parallel arm type mounting applications. 1. Manufacturers: a. ASSA ABLOY ACCENTRA, formerly known as Yale (YA) - 51BC Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) - 1250 Series. 2.8 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood (RO). 2.9 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood (RO). 2.10 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Manufacturers: 1. Pemko (PE). 2.11 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.12 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames. 3. Louvers installed in hollow metal doors. 4. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "General Conditions". 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 4. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors. 5. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 6. Division 08 Section "Access Control Hardware". 7. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing. 3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames. 11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 12. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. 13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. 15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, furnish SDI-Certified manufacturer products that comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames". C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL10C (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Provide labeled glazing material. E. Storm Shelter Openings: Provide complete door systems for hurricane or tornado storm shelters, and other areas of refuge, complying and tested according to ICC 500 (2014/2020), ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters. 1. Each unit to bear third party permanent label indicating compliance with the referenced testing standards. F. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Building Information Modeling (BIM) Support: Utilize designated BIM software tools and obtain training needed to successfully participate in the Project BIM processes. All technical disciplines are responsible for the product data integration and data reliability of their Work into the coordinated BIM applications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel doors and frames from a SDI Certified manufacturer: 1. CECO Door Products (C). 2. Curries Company (CU). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. 2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867. B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene. Where indicated, provide doors fabricated as thermal-rated assemblies with a minimum R-value of 2.8 or better. 3. Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. 5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. 3. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18 gauge (0.042-inch - 1.0-mm) thick steel, Model 2. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. 5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. D. Manufacturers Basis of Design: 1. Curries Company (CU) - Polystyrene Core - 707 Series. 2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. Curries Company (CU) - M CM Series. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. Curries Company (CU) - M Series. D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated. E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick. C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.6 LOUVERS A. Metal Louvers: Unless otherwise indicated provide louvers to meet the following requirements. 1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable. B. Louvers for Fire Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide louvers to meet rating indicated. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable. 2.7 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently. Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and installation indicated. B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20 gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8. C. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 2. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 3. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 4. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 5. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.). C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level, twist, and plumb condition. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. E. Verify tolerances against manufacturers installations instructions for tornado and hurricane storm shelter openings. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, leveled, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar. 4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections “Closeout Procedures”. Produce project punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved submittals and verification hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. Include list of items to be completed and corrected, indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to be incomplete or rejected. 1. Organization of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective Action Lists organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images and Video Recordings. SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated and acoustical. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2016). B. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. C. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details. 1. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). D. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 8 by 10 inch in size cut from top corner of door. E. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control programs. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. G. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project within the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this project. 2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. C. Quality Certification: 1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade or grades specified. 2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program. 3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program. 4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance with specified requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) Faced Doors: 1. Ampco Products, HYPERLINK "http://www.ampco.com/#sle"Inc: www.ampco.com/#sle. 2. Poncraft D HYPERLINK "http://www.poncraft.com/#sle"oor Co: www.poncraft.com/#sle. 3. VT Industries, HYPERLINK "http://www.vtindustries.com/#sle"Inc: www.vtindustries.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 DOORS AND PANELS A. Doors: Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Extra Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), unless noted otherwise. 2. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at each location. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with UL 10C - Positive Pressure; Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) or Intertek/Warnock Hersey (WHI) labeled without any visible seals when door is open. 3. High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) finish as indicated on drawings. 2.3 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated. B. Sound-Rated Doors: Equivalent to type, with particleboard core (PC) construction as required to achieve STC rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above. 2.4 DOOR FACINGS A. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) Facing for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: NEMA LD 3, HGS; Pattern as scheduled; finish as selected. B. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof. 2.5 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: 1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Hollow Metal Door Frames: As specified in Section 081113. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000. C. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. D. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 087100. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. D. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. B. Wall and Ceiling Mounted Units: Factory fabricated door and frame, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with type of installation assembly being used for each unit. 1. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 2. Frames: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch, minimum thickness. 3. Single Steel Sheet Door Panels: 1/16 inch, minimum thickness. 4. Steel Finish: Primed. 5. Primed and Factory Finish: Polyester powder coat; color . 6. Door/Panel Size: As indicated on the drawings. 7. Hardware: a. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. b. Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch. c. Gasketing: Extruded neoprene, around perimeter of door panel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. B. Begin installation only after substrates have been properly prepared, and if the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to proceeding with this work. B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for applicable substrates in accordance with project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary. SECTION 083100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling access door and frame units. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of each access door and/or panel unit. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each access unit.\ 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ASSEMBLIES A. Wall-Mounted Units: 1. Location: As indicated on drawings. 2. Material: Steel, hot-dipped zinc or zinc-aluminum-alloy coated. 3. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle. 4. Gypsum Board Mounting Criteria: Provide drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface. B. Wall-Mounted Units in Wet Areas: 1. Location: As indicated on drawings. 2. Material: Stainless steel. 3. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle. 4. Wall Mounting Criteria: Provide surface-mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface. C. Ceiling-Mounted Units: 1. Location: As indicated on drawings. 2. Material: Steel, hot-dipped zinc, or zinc-aluminum-alloy coated. 3. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle. 2.2 WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. ACUDOR Products Inc: www.acudor.com/#sle. 2. Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com/#sle. 3. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com/#sle. 4. Milcor, Inc: www.milcorinc.com/#sle. 5. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com/#sle. 6. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G132 SPECIFICATIONS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 M. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than 2 inches from each side of openings. N. Brace stud framing system rigid. O. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames; install supports and attachments. P. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, and blocking with electrical, mechanical, and other work to be placed within or behind stud framing. Q. Blocking: Use wood blocking secured to studs. Provide blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and opening frames. R. Sound Isolation Clips: Mechanically attach to framing or structure with fasteners recommended by clip manufacturer. Install at spacing indicated on drawings. S. Furring: Coordinate with sound isolation clip spacing and locations. Lap splices a minimum of 6 inches. 3.3 CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C754. B. Install furring after work above ceiling or soffit is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. C. Install furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work. D. Securely anchor hangers to structural members or embed in structural slab. Space hangers as required to limit deflection to criteria indicated. Use rigid hangers at exterior soffits. E. Space main carrying channels at maximum 72 inch on center, and not more than 6 inches from wall surfaces. Lap splice securely. F. Securely fix carrying channels to hangers to prevent turning or twisting and to transmit full load to hangers. G. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels, not more than 2 inches from perimeter walls, and rigidly secure. Lap splices securely. H. Reinforce openings in suspension system that interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each opening. I. Laterally brace suspension system. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal partition, ceiling, and soffit framing. B. Framing accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 072100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation. 1. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014, with Editorial Revision (2015). B. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2017. C. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2016. D. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016). E. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016. F. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate prefabricated work, component details, stud layout, framed openings, anchorage to structure, acoustic details, type and location of fasteners, accessories, and items of other related work. 2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks, splicing, and for blocking and reinforcement of framing connections. C. Product Data: Provide data describing framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts, and limitations. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of stud wall, ceiling, and soffit framing including insulation, sheathing, window frame, and door frame and finish specified in other sections. Coordinate with installation of associated work specified in other sections. 1. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. CEMCO HYPERLINK "http://www.cemcosteel.com/#sle": www.cemcosteel.com/#sle. 2. ClarkDietrich Building System HYPERLINK "http://www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle"s: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. 3. Mari HYPERLINK "http://www.marinoware.com/#sle"no: www.marinoware.com/#sle. 4. The Steel Network HYPERLINK "http://www.SteelNetwork.com/#sle", Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com/#sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Fire Rated Assemblies: Comply with applicable code and as indicated on drawings. B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: C shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. C. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. D. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and braced with continuous bridging on both sides. E. Deflection and Firestop Track: Intumescent strip factory-applied to track flanges expands when exposed to heat or flames to provide a perimeter joint seal. 1. Products: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; BlazeFrame Firestop Deflection Track: HYPERLINK "http://www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle" www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. A. Preformed Top Track Firestop Seal: 1. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems indicated on drawings. 2. Products: a. Hilti, Inc; Top Track Seal CFS TTS HYPERLINK "http://www.us.hilti.com/#sle": www.us.hilti.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Tracks and Runners: Same material and thickness as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs with provision for crimp locking to stud. C. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs; thickness to suit purpose; complying with applicable requirements of ASTM C754. D. Fasteners: ASTM C1002 self-piercing tapping screws. E. Sheet Metal Backing: 0.036 inch thick, galvanized. F. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated or Drilled expansion bolts. G. Acoustic Insulation: As specified in Section 072100. H. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent- based non-curing butyl sealant. I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections to sizes and profiles required. B. Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements. C. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STUD FRAMING A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C754. B. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. C. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs as indicated. E. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches on center. F. At partitions indicated with an acoustic rating: 1. Provide components and install as required to produce STC ratings as indicated, based on published tests by manufacturer conducted in accordance with ASTM E90 with STC rating calculated in accordance with ASTM E413. 2. Place one bead of acoustic sealant between runners and substrate, studs and adjacent construction. 3. Place one bead of acoustic sealant between studs and adjacent vertical surfaces. G. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall studs. H. Install studs vertically at spacing indicated on drawings. I. Align stud web openings horizontally. J. Secure studs to tracks using crimping method. Do not weld. K. Stud splicing is not permissible. L. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs. SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulating glass units. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015. C. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2015). D. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018. E. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. F. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. G. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. H. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass; 2015. I. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016. J. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. K. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2008. L. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008. M. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2017. N. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014, with Errata (2017). O. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Systems; 2017. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by each of the affected installers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit and Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples of glass units, showing coloration. E. Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM) for glazing installation methods. Maintain one copy on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years documented experience. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.7 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.2 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3. 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and FT where required by code. 3. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 criteria. 2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Polysulfide Sealant: Two component; chemical curing, non-sagging type; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color as selected. B. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color as selected. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch by height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Minimum 3 inch long by one half the height of the glazing stop by thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Splines: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option II; color black. D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing for insulating glass. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system. C. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively. D. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards. B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the interior of the building. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.5 INSTALLATION - WET GLAZING METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND) A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building. B. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer shims at 24 inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line. C. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips. D. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool surface to straight line. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.8 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing, with minimum three years of experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. 4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle. 5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com/#sle. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 3. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. C. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM C1177/C1177M. 4. Core Type: Type X, as indicated. 5. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 6. Edges: Square. 7. Glass Mat Faced Products: a. American Gypsum Company; M-Glass Exterior Sheathing Type X. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Fireguard Sheathing. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Sheathing. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 072500. B. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant. C. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.2 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. 1. Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-resistant sealant. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gypsum sheathing. B. Gypsum wallboard. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014, with Editorial Revision (2015). B. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2017. C. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2017a. D. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2015. E. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2016. F. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013. G. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel Products for Use as Sheathing; 2013a. H. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017. I. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016. J. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2016. 1. SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. C. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. SECTION 088300 -MIRRORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass mirrors. 1. Tempered safety glass. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1048 -Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. B. ASTM C1193 -Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. C. GANA (GM) -GANA Glazing Manual; 2008. D. GANA (TIPS) -Mirrors: Handle with Extreme Care (Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors); 2011. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Submit structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Submit chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available colors. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that mirrors, meets or exceeds specified requirements. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM) for glazing installation methods. B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with recommendations of GANA (TIPS). 1.5 FIELD CONITIONS A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.6 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Mirrors: 1. Binswanger Mirror/ACI Distribution: www.binswangerglass.com/#sle. 2. Lenoir Mirror Co: www.lenoirmirror.com/#sle. 3. Trulite Glass and Aluminum Solutions: www.trulite.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 -Product Requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Mirror Design Criteria: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirror material deflection to 1/200, or to the flexure limit of glass, with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. B. Mirror Glass: Clear, tempered safety glass; ASTM C1048, with copper and silver coatings, and protective overcoating. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Edges: Bevelled. 3. Size: As noted on drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; on release paper. D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. E. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. F. Mirror Adhesive: Silicone pre-polymer based, chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate. 1. Application Temperature: Minus 35 to 140 degrees F at contact surfaces. G. Channel Frame: One piece, channel frame, stainless steel, Type 430, satin finish, 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch by 3/8 inch deep with 90 degree mitered corners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of mirror frames or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for installation of mirrors. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous mirror frames or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C. Prepare installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release sealants, and install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA (TIPS) and manufacturers recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level, and free of optical distortion. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal methods. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Tile: 1 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination, but not less than one box of each type. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of fiv e years of documented experience. 1.6 MOCK-UP A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on drawings, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Minimum size of mock-up is indicated on drawings. 2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE A. Manufacturers: 1. Refer to Finish Legend. 2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Tile Products: As scheduled. 2.2 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base. 2. Manufacturers: Same as for tile. B. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1. Applications: a. Open edges of wall tile. b. Open edges of floor tile. c. Wall corners, outside and inside. d. Transition between floor finishes of different heights. e. Expansion and control joints, floor and wall. f. Floor to wall joints. g. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings. 2. Manufacturers: a. Schluter-Systems: HYPERLINK "http://www.schluter.com/#sle"www.schluter.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. ARDEX Engineered Ceme HYPERLINK "http://www.ardexamericas.com/#sle"nts: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. 2. Bostik HYPERLINK "http://www.bostik-us.com/#sle"Inc: www.bostik-us.com/#sle. 3. Custom Building Products HYPERLINK "http://www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle": www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. 4. LATICRETE International HYPERLINK "http://www.laticrete.com/#sle", Inc: www.laticrete.com/ #sle. 5. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.merkrete.com/#sle": www.merkrete.com/#sle. 6. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Bran HYPERLINK "http://www.tecspecialty.com/ #sle"d: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. 7. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Improved Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15. 1. Applications: Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond coat is indicated. 2. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; S HYPERLINK "http://www.ardexamericas.com/#sle"28: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Custom Building Products; Complete Contact-LFT Premium Rapid Setting Large Format Tile Mortar, with Multi-Surface Bonding Prim HYPERLINK "http://www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle"er: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum HYPERLINK "http://www.laticrete.com/#sle": www.laticrete.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. E. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to v ariance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive. I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. J. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. K. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F116, organic adhesive, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated. 2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F122, with latex-Portland cement grout. 3. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F131. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic and porcelain wall and floor tile. B. Coated glass mat backer board as tile substrate. C. Ceramic trim. D. Non-ceramic trim. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014. B. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). C. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). D. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised). E. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry- Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). F. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). G. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). H. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). I. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). J. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016). K. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). L. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed 2010). M. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013 (Revised). N. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016). O. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installation; 2014. P. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin- Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2014. Q. ANSI A118.15 - American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012. R. ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2013). S. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel; 2013. T. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2017. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. 2.4 GROUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. ARDEX Engineered Ceme HYPERLINK "http://www.ardexamericas.com/#sle"nts: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. 2. Bostik HYPERLINK "http://www.bostik-us.com/#sle"Inc: www.bostik-us.com/#sle. 3. Custom Building Products HYPERLINK "http://www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle": www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. 4. LATICRETE International HYPERLINK "http://www.laticrete.com/#sle", Inc: www.laticrete.com/ #sle. 5. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.merkrete.com/#sle": www.merkrete.com/#sle. 6. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide. 3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 4. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX HYPERLINK "http://www.ardexamericas.com/ #sle"FL: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Custom Building Products; Fusion Pro Single Component Grout: HYPERLINK "http://www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle" www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Gro HYPERLINK "http://www.laticrete.com/#sle"ut: www.laticrete.com/#sle. d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Pro Grout: HYPERLINK "http://www.merkrete.com/#sle"www.merkrete.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. C. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout. 1. Applications: Where indicated. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX WA HYPERLINK "http://www.ardexamericas.com/ #sle": www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Custom Building Products; CEG-IG 100% Solids Industrial Grade Epoxy Grout: HYPERLINK "http://www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle" www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout: HYPERLINK "http://www.laticrete.com/#sle" www.laticrete.com/#sle. d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Pro Epoxy HYPERLINK "http://www.merkrete.com/ #sle": www.merkrete.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement grout. 1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone. 2. Products: a. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Grout Seale HYPERLINK "http://www.merkrete.com/#sle"r: www.merkrete.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not intended as waterproofing. 1. Type: Fluid-applied. 2. Thickness: 20 mils, maximum. 3. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch gap, minimum. 4. Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane: HYPERLINK "http://www.laticrete.com/#sle" www.laticrete.com/#sle. b. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Fracture Gu HYPERLINK "http://www.merkrete.com/#sle"ard: www.merkrete.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch gap, minimum; comply with ANSI A118.12. 2. Fluid or Trowel Applied Type: a. Material: Synthetic rubber or Acrylic. b. Thickness: 25 mils, minimum, dry film thickness. c. Products: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX 8+ HYPERLINK "http://www.ardexamericas.com/#sle"9: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. 2. Custom Building Products; RedGard Crack Prevention and Waterproofing Membrane: HYPERLINK "http://www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle" www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. 3. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE HYDRO BAN HYPERLINK "http://www.laticrete.com/#sle": www.laticrete.com/#sle. 4. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Hydro Guard 200 HYPERLINK "http://www.merkrete.com/#sle"0: www.merkrete.com/#sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 3. Bonded Sheet Membrane Type: a. Material: Polyethylene sheet membrane with non-woven fabric laminated to both sides, 20 to 30 mils thick, nominal. b. Products: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX SK HYPERLINK "http://www.ardexamericas.com/#sle"175: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. 2. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane: HYPERLINK "http://www.laticrete.com/#sle" www.laticrete.com/#sle. 3. Noble Company; NobleSeal TS HYPERLINK "http://www.noblecompany.com/#sle": www.noblecompany.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. C. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 by 2 inch size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized D. Backer Board: Coated glass mat type complying with ASTM C1178/C1178M; inorganic fiberglass mat on both surfaces and integral acrylic coating vapor retarder. 1. Fire Resistant Type: Type X core, thickness 5/8 inch. E. Mesh Tape: 2 inch wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape. A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset mastic type. 1. Use Type I in areas subject to prolonged moisture exposure. 2. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX D1 HYPERLINK "http://www.ardexamericas.com/ #sle"4: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Custom Building Products; ReliaBond Ceramic Tile Adhesive - Type 1: HYPERLINK "http://www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle" www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 15 Premium Mastic HYPERLINK "http://www.laticrete.com/#sle": www.laticrete.com/#sle. d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Merstik HYPERLINK "http://www.merkrete.com/ #sle": www.merkrete.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G133 SPECIFICATIONS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STAIR COVERING A. Stair Treads: Rubber; full width and depth of stair tread in one piece; tapered thickness. 1. Manufacturers: a. Roppe Corp HYPERLINK "http://www.roppe.com/#sle": www.roppe.com/#sle. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. 3. Nosing: Square. 4. Color: As indicated on drawings. 5. Acceptable Products: As scheduled. B. Stair Stringers: Full height in one piece and in maximum available lengths, matching treads in material and color. 1. Nominal Thickness: 0.080 inch. .2.2 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove. 1. Manufacturers: a. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company HYPERLINK "http://www.johnsonite.com/#sle": www.johnsonite.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. 3. Height: 4 inch. 4. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 5. Finish: Satin. 6. Color: As indicated on drawings. 7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and internal corners. 8. Acceptable Products: As scheduled. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured. D. Clean substrate. E. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints and butt seams tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. 3.4 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.5 INSTALLATION - STAIR COVERINGS A. Install stair coverings in one piece for full width and depth of tread. B. Install stringers configured tightly to stair profile. C. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. SECTION 096500 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient base. B. Resilient stair accessories. C. Installation accessories. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2017. B. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2016. C. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate floor patterns. D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space. B. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. C. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. D. Do not double stack pallets. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints and direction of carpet pile. D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed of each color and pattern installed. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. 1.5 ATTIC STOCK A. Provide 10% attic stock for CPT. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products: 1. As scheduled. 1. ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, color as selected by Architect. C. Carpet Tile Installation Tabs: Precut adhesive tabs to connect carpet tiles to produce a continuous mat and adhere to subfloor. 1. Provide product acceptable to tile carpting manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. F. Adhere carpet tile to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. SECTION 095100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Translucent stretched fabric ceiling panels. C. Acoustical units. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2017. B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013. C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2017. D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning. C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. D. Samples: Submit two full size samples illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 8 inches long, of suspension system main runner. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustic Tiles/Panels: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.armstrong.com/#sle" : www.armstrong.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Suspension Systems: 1. Same as for acoustical units. 2. Rockfon, L HYPERLINK "http://www.rockfon.com/#sle" LC: www.rockfon.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. C. Translucent Stretched Fabric Ceiling Panels: 1. Eco-Ceiling. 2. Substitutions: Not allowed. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. B. Acoustical Panels: Products as scheduled. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. B. A. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.2 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size. D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. 3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. G. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. SECTION 097200 WALL COVERINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Wall covering for wall applications. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2017. B. ASTM F793/F793M - Standard Classification of Wall Coverings by Use Characteristics; 2015. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations with seaming layout. D. Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering in size illustrating color, finish, and texture. E. Test Reports: Indicate verification of flame and smoke ratings, when tested by UL. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. G. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of covered surfaces. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.5 MOCK-UP A. Provide panel, 2 panel drops wide, full height, illustrating installed wall covering and joint seaming technique. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability. B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. C. Do not store roll goods on end. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer. B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall covering. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Wall Covering: Fabric-backed vinyl roll stock. 1. Conform to ASTM F793/F793M, Category V, Type II. 2. Provide digitally printed custom graphic wall covering on feature wall as indicated. Coordinate with Architect. 3. Acceptable Products: As scheduled. C. Wall Covering: Wood veneer. 1. Acceptable Products: As scheduled. D. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate. E. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to requirements of the wall covering manufacturer. B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply wall coverings if moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16 inch/ft. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth. B. Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry. C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects. E. Marks: Seal with shellac those that may bleed through surface finishes. F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply adhesive to wall surface immediately prior to application of wall covering. C. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces. D. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. E. Butt edges tightly. F. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. G. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. H. Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface. I. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. J. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll. K. Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond. L. Install termination trim. M. Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas. END OF SECTION SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 General Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Complete surface preparation and finishing for field application of coatings and requirements for field finishing mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of the specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this Section. 3. Colors, including deep tones, will be selected by the Architect. Number of colors to be used on job will be determined by Architect. 1.2 SURFACES NOT TO RECEIVE FIELD FINISHING A. Do not paint copper, bronze, chrome plated items, nickel, stainless steel, Monel metal, lead, face brick, prefinished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings, items with factory applied final finish (except where exposed on roofs and in finished spaces), elevator shafts, crawl spaces, chases, and plenums above suspended ceilings unless otherwise specified or scheduled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with 3 years' experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years' experience. C. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for flame spread/fuel contribution/smoke development rating requirements for finishes. B. Comply with applicable city, county, state, and federal requirements and ordinances regarding maximum VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of all coatings. 1.6 TESTS A. Provide periodic testing with Wet Film Thickness gage to verify that proper thickness of finish coatings are being applied. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data describing physical performance criteria and composition on all finishing products. B. Submit 2 samples, 12 by 12 inches in size illustrating range of colors and textures selected for each surface finishing product scheduled. C. Submit certification from manufacturer of coatings listing all products proposed for each. Certify that each product meets current applicable regulations and ordinances regarding maximum VOC content. 1.8 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field sample panel, 96 inches long by 96 inches wide, illustrating each coating color, texture, and finish intended for use. B. Locate where directed. C. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Division 01 section “Product Requirements” B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well-ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the ranges required by paint manufacturer. B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 75 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid- height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a 5 gallon container of each color to Owner. B. Label each container with color, color number, texture, and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. C. Furnish under provisions of Section 017000. 1.12 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and paint work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.13 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not store paints, oils, thinners and other flammable items inside the building and shall be stored in approved containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept at a minimum. B. Precaution shall be taken to protect the public and construction workers during the progress of the work. C. Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammable materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams. 2. P.P.G. Industries. 3. Behr Process Corporation (Behr). B. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be product of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first quality products of a reputable manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating with good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. 2.3 FINISHES A. Color and Sheen: As scheduled. 1. INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Drywall (Gypsum): 1. Acrylic Latex: a. PPG Paints: 1 coat PPG Paints Speedhide Zero VOC Primer 6-4900XI, 2 coats PPG Paints Speedhide Zero VOC. Sheen as indicated. b. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat High Build Latex Primer B28W8601, 2 coats Sherwin-Williams c. ProMar 200 Zero VOC. Sheen as indicated. d. Behr: 1 coat Behr Premium Plus Interior Drywall Primer 73, 2 coats Behr Pro i300 Interior Paint. Sheen as indicated. B. Galvanized Metal: 1. High Performance Coating, Water Based Acrylic a. PPG Paints: 1 coat DEVFLEX Direct-to-Metal 4020 primer 1. Flat: 2 Coats DEVLFEX 4020 Primer/Finish. 2. Eggshell: 2 coats DEVFLEX High Performance WB Acrylic 4212 topcoat. 3. Semi-Gloss: 2 coats DEVFLEX High Performance WB Acrylic 4216 topcoat. b. Sherwin-Williams: 1. Flat: 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66-310 Series, 2. Eg-Shel 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Eg-Shel B66-660 Series. 3. Semi-Gloss 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss B66-650 Series. c. Behr: 1 coat Behr Premium Plus Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer 436. 1. Flat: 2 coats Premium Plus Ultra Interior Matte 1750 topcoat. 2. Eggshell: 2 coats Premium Plus Ultra Eggshell 2750 topcoat. 3. Semi-Gloss: 2 coats Direct To Metal Semi-Gloss 3200 topcoat. C Shop Primed Ferrous Metal: 1. High Performance Coating, Water-Based Acrylic: a. PPG Paints: Eggshell: 2 topcoats DEVFLEX High Performance WB Acrylic Eggshell 4212 over prepared substrate. Test for adhesion. b. 2 topcoats Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Eg-Shel B66-660 Series. c. Behr: Eggshell: 1 coat Premium Plus Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer, 2 coats Premium Plus Ultra Eggshell 2750 topcoat. H. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. I. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. J. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. K. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. L. Interior Wood Items Schedule to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. M. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied. N. Shop Finished Items: Finish in accordance with AWI standards and guide lines. O. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 APPLICATION A. The intent of these Specifications is to produce the highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. The proper preparation of all surfaces will be strictly enforced and wherever finished surfaces show any defects due to improper preparation, workmanship, etc., the defects shall be removed and the work refinished at the expense of the Contractor. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish coats shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be free and smooth of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. D. Apply each coat to uniform finish and thickness. E. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. F. Sand lightly between coats on wood and metal items to achieve required finish. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork scheduled to be painted with primer paint. J. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. K. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint all shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items where exposed to view in finished spaces. In mechanical rooms, repair shop pre-finished coatings which have been scratched or otherwise damaged with identical touch-up paint. Sand prior to touching up as required. B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. C. Paint all grilles, registers, diffusers, and speaker grilles to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, except that factory pre-finished items need not be painted if installed in a suspended acoustical ceiling system where the acoustical panels match the mechanical or electrical item color. D. In all finished spaces, prime and paint exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports. Paint to match adjacent surfaces. E. Repair or replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convectors that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector to match face panels. G. Paint all surfaces of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Paint exposed air handlers, roof ventilators, goose necks, exhaust fans and other items on the roof with 2 coats exterior enamel. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the base metal or primer as specified herein. J. Paint concrete support bases with gray floor deck enamel. K. Pipe hangers and other supports need not be painted except where installed in crawl spaces, where they shall be painted with a thick coat of asphaltic paint. 3.6 CLEANING/TOUCH-UP A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. D. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing (as determined by the Architect). Otherwise, re-coat entire section to corners or to a visible stopping point. 3.7 V.O.C. (VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND) COMPLIANCE A. Products listed in following schedule and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be formulated to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O.C. content. Utilize products which have been specially formulated to meet such requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report to Architect any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 3. Exterior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. D. Test shop applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. Remove existing coatings which exhibit loose surface defects. C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. F. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. G. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G134 SPECIFICATIONS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 SECTION 123600 - COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2017. C. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program; current editi HYPERLINK "http://www.awiqcp.org/"on at www.awiqcp.org. D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2016). E. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1; 2016, with Errata (2017). F. ISFA 3-01 - Classification and Standards for Quartz Surfacing Material; 2013. G. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual, Version VIII; 2016. H. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. I. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. F. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control programs. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Quality Certification: 1. Comply with AWI (QCP) woodwork association quality certification service/program in accordance with requirements for work specified in this sectio HYPERLINK "http://www.awiqcp.org/#sle"n: www.awiqcp.org/#sle. 2. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade or grades specified. 3. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program. 4. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program. 5. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance with specified requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Self-supporting high-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) panel with decorative surface over structural members. 1. Panels: Phenolic resin impregnated Kraft paper core with melamine impregnated decorative surface papers; NEMA LD 3 Grade CGS. a. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporatio HYPERLINK "http://www.formica.com/#sle"n: www.formica.com/#sle. b. Panel Thickness: 1 inch. c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. d. Core Color: Brown. e. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20. f. Surface Color and Pattern: As scheduled. 2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square natural cut sanded and polished to semi-gloss sheen. 3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction; minimum 4 inches high. SECTION 122400 WINDOW SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Window shades and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2015. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work related to products of this section; require attendance of all affected installers. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken. 2. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including materials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size, location and keys to details. D. Shop Drawings - Motorized Shades: Provide schematic system riser diagram indicating component interconnections. Include requirements for interface with other systems. E. Certificates: Manufacturer's documentation that line voltage components are UL listed or UL recognized. F. Source Quality Control Submittals: Provide test reports indicating compliance with specified fabric properties. G. Selection Samples: Include fabric samples in full range of available colors and patterns. 1. Motorized Shades: Include finish selections for controls. H. Verification Samples: Minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual materials, color and pattern. I. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. J. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control systems and show interconnecting wiring. K. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of shop drawings. L. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each opening. B. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide manufacturer's warranty from Date of Substantial Completion, covering the following: 1. Shade Hardware: One year. 2. Electric Motors: One year. 3. Fabric: One year. 4. Aluminum and Steel Coatings: One year. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manually Operated Roller Shades: 1. Archtiectural E Screen 7501, Hunter Douglas, Finish: White pearl, 1% Openess Note: 96" Railroaded on width no seam. Mount to underside of gypsum board soffit at window opening. Do not mount to Window frame B. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier. 2.2 WINDOW SHADE APPLICATIONS A. Interior Roller Shades: Sheer shades. 1. Type: Roll down, closed position is at window sill. 2. Fabric: As scheduled. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors. 4. Mounting: Inside (between jambs). 5. Operation: Manual. 2.3 ROLLER SHADES A. Roller Shades: Fabric roller shades complete with mounting brackets, roller tubes, hembars, hardware and accessories. 1. Drop: Regular roll. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. B. Fabric: Non-flammable, color-fast, impervious to heat and moisture, and able to retain its shape under normal operation. 1. Sheer Shades: Reduce glare yet still reveal considerable details to the outside; no privacy; Openness Factor greater than 1 percent. 2. Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large and small tests. C. Roller Tubes: As required for type of operation. 1. Material: Extruded aluminum or galvanized steel; as required for shade location. 2. Size: Manufacturer's standard, selected for suitability for installation conditions, span, and weight of shades. 3. Fabric Attachment: Utilize extruded channel in tube to accept vinyl spline welded to fabric edge. D. Hembars: Designed for weight requirements and adaptation to uneven surfaces, to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat. 1. Style: Exposed aluminum bottom bar, rectangular profile with closed ends, containing a spline groove top to receive and secure fabric end. 2. Finish: Painted. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. E. Manual Operation for Interior Shades: Clutch operated continuous loop; beaded ball chain. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fascias: Size as required to conceal shade mounting. 1. Style: As selected by Architect from shade manufacturer’s full selection. 2. Material and Color: To match shade. B. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting configuration and span indicated. C. Fasteners: Non-corrosive, and as recommended by shade manufacturer. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication. B. Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances. 1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottom bar and window stool. 2. Horizontal Dimensions - Inside Mounting: Provide symmetrical light gaps on both sides of shade not to exceed 3/4 inch total. C. Dimensional Tolerances: As recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. At openings requiring continuous multiple shade units with separate rollers, locate roller joints at window mullion centers; butt rollers end-to-end. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate under the project conditions. B. Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, using mounting devices as indicated. B. Installation Tolerances: 1. Inside Mounting: Maximum space between shade and jamb when closed of 1/16 inch. 2. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/16 inch. C. Replace shades that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to Owner. D. Adjust level, projection and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no telescoping of shade fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer. B. Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition. 3.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. B. See Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements. C. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation and maintenance of window shade system to Owner's personnel. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.7 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. END OF SECTION SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2017. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cabinets and cabinet physical dimensions. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Ansul, a Tyco Business HYPERLINK "http://www.ansul.com/#sle": www.ansul.com/#sle. 2. Kidde, a unit of United Technologies C HYPERLINK "http://www.kidde.com/#sle"orp: www.kidde.com/#sle. 3. Nystrom, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.nystrom.com/#sle": www.nystrom.com/#sle. 4. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Busines HYPERLINK "http://www.pyrochem.com/#sle"s: www.pyrochem.com/#sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. Kidde, a unit of United Technologies C HYPERLINK "http://www.kidde.com/#sle"orp: www.kidde.com/#sle. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing C HYPERLINK "http://www.larsensmfg.com/#sle"o: www.larsensmfg.com/#sle. 3. Nystrom, Inc HYPERLINK "http://www.nystrom.com/#sle": www.nystrom.com/#sle. 4. Potter-Roem HYPERLINK "http://www.potterroemer.com/#sle"er: www.potterroemer.com/ #sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gauge. 1. Class: A:B:C type. 2. Size: 5 pound. 3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color. 4. Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees F to 120 degrees F. 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Cabinet Construction: Non-fire rated. 1. Formed aluminium. B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type. 1. Size to accommodate accessories. 2. Projected Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 2-1/2 inch projection, and 2 inch wide face. 3. Provide cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams, and with formed perimeter trim. C. Door: 0.036 inch metal thickness, reinforced for flatness and rigidity with nylon catch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge. D. Door Glazing: Float glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick, and set in resilient channel glazing gasket. E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement of anchors. F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. G. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: White. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, galvanized and enamel finished. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, not more than 48 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers in cabinets. SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Code required signage. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition. B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule. 3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment. E. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips. F. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Signs: 1. Best Sign Systems HYPERLINK "http://www.bestsigns.com/#sle", Inc: www.bestsigns.com/ #sle. 2. HYPERLINK "http://www.inprocorp.com/#sle"Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle. 3. Mohawk Sign Systems HYPERLINK "http://www.mohawksign.com/#sle", Inc: www.mohawksign.com/#sle. 4. Seton Identification Produc HYPERLINK "http://www.seton.com/aec/#sle"ts: www.seton.com/aec/#sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Provide interior signage only as required to comply with building code. 2.3 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Radiused. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: As approved by Architect. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: As scheduled. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal. B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Locate signs and mount at heights indicated on drawings and in accordance with ADA Standards and HYPERLINK "https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00006864 &item_key_date=901231&input_doc_number=ICC&input_doc_title" ICC A117.1. D. HYPERLINK "https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00006864 &item_key_date=901231&input_doc_number=ICC&input_doc_title"Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items. SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 G135 SPECIFICATIONS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 1. CONTRACTOR TO VISIT PROJECT SITE AND BUILDING, PRIOR TO BID. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT DESIGN INTENT CAN BE EXECUTED AFTER THOROUGH REVIEW OF EXISTING CONDITIONS, INCLUDING ALL STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS. 3. BUILDING AND SITE TO REMAIN SECURE DURING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION. 4. PROTECT ALL ITEMS TO REMAIN (WALLS, PLUMBING FIXTURES, PIPING, HVAC UNITS, COLUMNS, ETC). 5. CONTRACTOR TO PROTECT EXISTING FINISHES ADJACENT TO DEMOLITION WORK. 6. CONTRACTOR TO PATCH AND REPAIR ALL WORK, ESPECIALLY WORK ADJACENT TO EXISTING AREAS, AS REQUIRED. 7. CONTRACTOR TO REPAIR ANY AREAS DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION. 8. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE DEMOLITION OPENINGS WITH NEW PLANS AND ELEVATIONS. 9. REMOVE EXISTING GYP BOARD OR PLASTER AS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE NEW BLOCKING IN EXISTING WALLS FOR NEW CASEWORK AND EQUIPMENT. 10. REMOVE EXISTING FINISHES AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMADATE INSTALLATION OF NEW FINISH ITEMS. 11. PATCH AND REPAIR EXIST. WALLS AS REQ TO MATCH ADJACENT FINISH. GENERAL NOTES DEMOLITION PLANS EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN1 NOTES BY NUMBER DEMOLITION PLANS DEMO EXISTING EXTERIOR WINDOW, FRAME, AND WALL AS REQ. PREP FOR NEW DOOR. PRICE SEPARATELY PER ALTERNATE 01. 2 PRESERVE AND PROTECT EXISTING ROOF HATCH LOCATION. 3 67 ' - 9 1 / 2 " N.I.C. N.I.C. 2' - 0 " 17 ' - 1 1 1 / 2 " EXTENT OF NEW CONSTRUCTION EXTENT OF WALL, MILLWORK, CEILING AND DOOR DEMO EXTENT OF NEW CONSTRUCTION EXTENT OF WALL, MILLWORK CEILING, AND DOOR DEMO 2' - 0 " 13 ' - 7 1 / 4 " 2' - 0" V.I.F. 16' - 11" 1 1 V.I.F. 18' - 11" 2 2 3 REFER TO SHEET G-200 FOR GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES. REMOVE ALL 1. FLOOR FINISHES 2. WALL FINISHES INCLUDING WALL BASE & HVAC GRILLES (PLASTER OR GYPSUM BOARD TO REMAIN WHERE FEASIBLE), 3. WALL PROTECTION 4. FURNISHINGS, 5. MILLWORK, 6. EQUIPMENT, 7. PLUMBING FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES RELATED TO EXISTING TENANT FINISH OUT. DO NOT REMOVE CORE BUILDING ELEMENTS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN WRITING OF ANY ITEMS OR COMPONENTS IN QUESTION PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. CAP AND ABANDON PLUMBING LINES ONLY AS ALLOWED BY BUILDING MANAGEMENT 8. CEILINGS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO CEILING SUPPORTS, LIGHTING, & GRILLES REFER TO SPECIFIC KEY NOTES ON PLANS FOR EXCEPTIONS. NOT IN CONTRACT A C EXISTING ELEMENT TO REMAIN (SHOWN GRAYSCALE) EXISTING ELEMENTS TO BE REMOVED (SHOWN DASHED BLACK) REMOVE DOOR AND DOOR FRAME. DEMOLITION LEGEND SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 AD111 DEMO FLOOR PLAN PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 PLAN NORTH TRUE NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"1 DEMO FLOOR PLAN - LEVEL 01 1 1/ A 7 1 1 2/ A 7 1 1 3/A711 4/A711 6/A711 14/A711 13 / A 7 1 1 1/ A 7 1 2 4/ A 7 1 2 6/ A 7 1 2 2/A712 5/A712 8/ A 7 1 2 15/A711 3/A712 11/A712 N.I.C. N.I.C. 3/A712 119 EXAM 12 120 STORAGE 121 EXAM 13 122 EXAM 14 118 EXAM 11 117 EXAM 10 116 EXAM 09 115 EXAM 08 114 IT/ELEC 113 EXAM 07 110 EXAM 06 106 EXAM 03 105 EXAM 02 104 EXAM 01 111 STAFF TLT 112 BREAKROOM 127 MA STATION 109 EXAM 05 108 EXAM 04 123 EXAM 15 124 NURSING 100 WAITING 128 LAB 125 RECEPTION 107 SHARED OFFICE 130 STORAGE 103 VITALS 132 TLT 129 TLT 12 ' - 8 7 / 8 " 11 ' - 6 " 11 ' - 6 " 10 ' - 5 1 / 8 " CL E A R 5' - 0 " 10 ' - 5 5 / 8 " 6' - 1 0 5 / 8 " CL E A R 5' - 0 " 8' - 8 " 5' - 8 7 / 8 " 5' - 8 7 / 8 " 5' - 8 7 / 8 " 8' - 3 1 / 8 " CLEAR 5' - 0" CL E A R 5' - 0 " CLEAR 5' - 0" 9' - 8 7/8"9' - 10"7' - 6"9' - 10"9' - 10"9' - 10"9' - 10"9' - 10"15' - 11 5/8" 18 ' - 0 3 / 8 " 13 ' - 3 3 / 4 " 35 ' - 1 0 1 / 8 " 2' - 0 " 1' - 0 " 8' - 1 1 " 2' - 9 1 / 2 " 7 1 / 4 " 6' - 4 3 / 4 " 11 ' - 7 5 / 8 " 7' - 11 7/8"7' - 0"6' - 6 1/8"17' - 0 3/4" 7' - 0 " 12 ' - 3 5 / 8 " 4' - 1 0 " 22' - 3 7/8"3' - 2 1/4" 1' - 11 1/2"1' - 0 1/2" 4' - 6"6' - 10 5/8" CLEAR 4' - 2"2' - 8 7/8"2' - 7" CLEAR 4' - 0"10' - 7 3/8" 3' - 0 5 / 8 " 7' - 1 0 7 / 8 " 4' - 1 0 1 / 8 " 5' - 2 7 / 8 " 8' - 6 1 / 4 " 4' - 7 " 10' - 2 5/8" 1' - 7 1/4" 7' - 10 7/8"21' - 8 1/8" 2' - 4" 24' - 1 7/8"8' - 2 7/8"7' - 0 7/8"9' - 6"9' - 11 3/8" CLEAR 5' - 3 1/2"10' - 3 1/2"5' - 11 1/8"10' - 2 5/8" 1 12 2 12 1 12 0 11 9 11 7 11 6 11 5 11 4 113 11 1 110 132 130 109 108 129 10 7 10 6 10 5 10 4 100B 10 0 A 124 12 3 12 6 125 F2C F2C F3C F3C F3C F3C F3 C F3 C F3 C F3 C A121 1 A121 1 SIM 7' - 6 " 7' - 2 5/8" 7' - 6 " 7' - 2 5/8" 126 OFFICE 7/A711 5/A711 12/A711 10 / A 7 1 2 9/A712 8/A711 10/A711 9/A711 16 / A 7 1 1 A121 1 SIM A121 1 SIM EQ EQ 102 TLT 131 EVS 102 101 RISER ROOM 131 11 8 A6A 7' - 7 1 / 8 " A6 A A6A 2 2 2 2 2 2 17 ' - 4 1 / 4 " A6A 15 ' - 3 " 11 ' - 4 7 / 8 " 5' - 5 7 / 8 " CL E A R 5' - 0 " 11 ' - 7 5 / 8 " 9' - 3 7/8"7' - 0"6' - 4 7/8"3' - 10 1/4"4' - 10 7/8"1' - 11 1/8"6' - 5 3/4" CL E A R 4' - 0 " 5' - 0 " CL E A R 2' - 8 " 3' - 2 1 / 8 " O.H. 10' - 8 3/4" A121 6 A121 8 A121 7 F2 C F2C F2 C A121 9 35.00° 2' - 2 3/4" 7' - 10" 3 3 CL E A R 5' - 0 " 1 44 4 4 4 4 A3 C F3 C 2 7/ A 7 1 2 7/ A 7 1 2 5 17 / A 7 1 1 15 ' - 4 3 / 8 " 4' - 1 0 7 / 8 " 11 / A 7 1 1 A121 10 A121 10 SIM A121 10 SIM A121 10 SIM A6 C F3C F3C F3C 112 5 1' - 11 3/8"5' - 4 7/8" 1' - 1 1 3 / 8 " 12 ' - 7 5 / 8 " CLEAR 4' - 0" CLEAR 4' - 0" 1' - 1 1 3 / 8 " 12 ' - 7 5 / 8 " 5' - 6 1/8" 1 1 / 4 " 7 6 CL E A R 3' - 0 3 / 4 " 13 3 10 1 7' - 6 " 4' - 1 1 " CL E A R 5' - 0 " 4' - 1 1 " CL E A R 5' - 0 " CL E A R 5' - 2 " CL E A R 5' - 0 " CLEAR 4' - 0" TY P . CLEAR 1' - 6" MIN CL E A R 1' - 6 " M I N . EQ EQ 2' - 0 7 / 8 " 2' - 4 3 / 8 " CLEAR 6' - 0" CLEAR 4' - 0" ALIGN FINISH FACE TO ADJACENT WALLS1 PROVIDE OPACITY FILM ON INTERIOR SIDE OF EXISTING STOREFRONT GLASS BOD: FASARA GLASS FINISHES; OPAQUE MATTE WINDOW FINISH MANUF: 3M COLOR: WHITE SH2MA0W 2 PROVIDE TRANSLUCENT FILM ON INTERIOR SIDE OF EXISTING STOREFRONT GLASS. BOD: FASARA GLASS FINISHES; SEMI- TRANSPARENT FROSTED WINDOW FILM MANUF: 3M COLOR: DUSTED CRYSTAL; 7725SE-314 3 PROVIDE COLUMN WRAP AT EXISTING COLUMNS. KEEP STUDS TIGHT TO FACE OF COLUMN 4 PROVIDE MS2 ROLLER SHADE ON INTERIOR SIDE OF EXISTING STOREFRONT GLASS. RE: FINISH LEGEND 5 NOTES BY NUMBER FLOOR PLAN LINE OF SOFFIT ABOVE.6 1. PARTITION TYPES APPLY TO INTERIOR PARTITIONS ONLY. 2. REFERENCE REFLECTING CEILING PLANS AND LIFESAFETY PLANS TO DETERMINE FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS. FIRE RATED NOTATION SUPERSEDE HEAD CONDITION INDICATION. 3. SLIP TRACK HEAD CONDITIONS ARE REQUIRED AT ALL PARITIONS TO DECK OR STRUCTURE. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL FOR DEFLECTION CRITERIA. 4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTING THE COMPLETE ASSEMBLY OF ALL FIRE RATED PARTITIONS IN FULL ACCORDANCE WITH UL LISTING. 5. ALL INTERIOR PARTIIONS STUDS TO BE 25 GAUGE MINIMUM, SHAFT WALL STUDS TO 20 GAUGE MINIMUM. REFER STUD SPAN FOR SPACNIG AND BRACING. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS FOR FRAMED OPENING CONDITIONS 6. REFERENCE CHART BELOW FOR MINIMUM REQUIRE PARTITION BRACING REQUIREMENT. 7. STC RATINGS REFLECT LAB TEST INFORMATION. 8. WHEN SOUND ATTENUATION BATTS AND AN ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AT TOP AND BOTTOM OF PARTITION ARE INSTALLED. 9. PARTITIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH SCHEDULED FINISHES FOR PARTITION LAYOUT AND REQUIRED CLEARANCES. 10. PROVIDE BLOCKING IN PARTITIONS FOR WALL SUPPORTED ELEMENTS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, ACCESSORIES, FURNITURE, ART, AV VENDORS. 11. FOR INTERIOR FRAMING LIMITING HEIGHTS REFER TO SSMA TABLES FOR INTERIOR NON-STRUCTURAL NON- COMPOSITE PARTITIONS. 12. CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM STUD SIZING AND SPACING PER CRITERIA IN SPECIFICATIONS. A = UNBRACED PARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK WALLS WILL TERMINATE TO BOTTOM OF STRUCTURAL DECK B = PARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK WALLS WILL TERMINATE TO BOTTOM OF STRUCTURAL DECK C = PARTITION TO ABOVE CEILING WALLS WILL TERMINATE AT A MINIMUM OF 6" ABOVE HIGHEST ADJOINING CEILING UNLESS NOTES OTHERWISE ON PLAN. TERMINATE 1 FULL COURSE ABOVE AT MASONRY WALLS D = PARTITION TO BOTTOM OF CEILING WALL EXTENDS TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING. E = PARTIAL HEIGHT PARITION RE: ELEVATIONS FOR HEIGHT. PARTITION TYPES TABLE A- PARTITION TYPE CONSTRUCTION ASSEMBLY TABLE B- FRAMING DEPTH SCHEDULE TAG NUMBER DESIGNATION MTL STUD DEPTH MTL C-H STUD DEPTH WOOD STUD DEPTH GENERAL NOTES GN-01.PARTITIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH SCHEDULED FINISHES FOR PARTITION LAYOUT AND REQUIRED CLEARANCES. GN-02.PROVIDE BLOCKING IN PARTITIONS FOR WALL SUPPORTED ELEMENTS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, ACCESSORIES, FURNITURE, ART, AV VENDORS. GN-03.FOR INTERIOR FRAMING LIMITING HEIGHTS REFER TO SSMA TABLES FOR INTERIOR NON- STRUCTURAL NON-COMPOSITE PARTITIONS GN-04. CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM STUD SIZING AND SPACING PER CRITERIA IN SPECIFICATIONS. GN-06. REQUIRED MINIMUM STC RATING NOTED IN PARTITION SCHEDULES: SERIES SHEATHING FRAMING MEMBERS SHEATHING 1 LAYER METAL C STUD 1 LAYERA 1 LAYER METAL C STUD 1 LAYERB 1 LAYER METAL C STUD 2 LAYERSC 1 LAYER METAL C STUD NONED 2 LAYERS METAL C STUD NONEE 1 LAYER METAL HAT CHANNELNONEF 1 LAYER NONE NONEG 1 LAYER METAL C-H STUD NONEH 2 LAYERS METAL C-H STUD LINER PNLJ 1 LAYER (2) METAL C STUDS 1 LAYERK 2 LAYERS (2) METAL C STUDS 2 LAYERSL NONE CMU NONEM RESERVED FOR FUTURE EXPANSIONN-U CUSTOM N/A N/AV-Z GN-05. PROVIDE 16 AND 18 GAUGE METAL FOR STRUCTURAL FRAMING; AND 20, 22, AND 25 GAUGE FOR NON-STRUCTURAL FRAMING. ADJUST GAUGE ACCORDINGLY FOR VERTICALLY SPANNING WALLS. - 7/8" FURRING CHANNEL N/A0 1 5/8" N/A N/A1 NO FRAMING 2 1/2"N/A" N/A2 3 5/8" N/A N/A3 4" N/A N/A4 6" N/A N/A6 8" N/A N/A8 10" N/A N/A10 ## / ## WITH SOUND ATTENUATION WITHOUT SOUND ATTENUATION A B C D E PARTITION TO EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION REF. ELEVATION FOR HEIGHT 3-5/8" MTL. STUD BRACING AT 45' (TYP) STAGGERED AT 4'-0" EACH SID SECURED TO STRUCTURE PARTITION TO EXTEND ABOVE CEILING EXISTING PARTITION TO EXTEND ABOVE CEILING CEILING HEIGHT SHOULD NOT EXCEED MAX. UNBRACED STUD HEIGHT SUSPENDED CEILING AS SCHEDULED EXISTING PARTITION TO EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK PARTITION TAG PARTITION HEAD CONDITION (SEE GRAPH 1 - BELOW) FRAMING MEMBER DEPTH (SEE TABLE B - BELOW) PARTITION SERIES (SEE TABLE A - BELOW) A4A SOUND ATTENUATION - WALL INSTANCE (SEE CONSTRUCTION PLAN) PARTITION TYPE LEGEND 1 LAYER OF 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD METAL STUD - REFER SCHEDULE BASIC PARTITION THICKNESS LINE OF STRUCTURE ACOUSTICAL OR FIRESTOPPING SEALANT WHERE INDICATED SOUND ATTENUATION BATTS WHERE INDICATED LINE OF STRUCTURE ACOUSTICAL OR FIRESTOPPING SEALANT WHERE INDICATED METAL STUD TRACK LINE OF CEILING METAL STUD TRACK METAL STUD - REFER SCHEDULE LINE OF STRUCTURE ACOUSTICAL OR FIRESTOPPING SEALANT WHERE INDICATED SOUND ATTENUATION BATTS WHERE INDICATED LINE OF STRUCTURE ACOUSTICAL OR FIRESTOPPING SEALANT WHERE INDICATED METAL STUD TRACK LINE OF CEILING METAL STUD TRACK 1 LAYER OF 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD 1. RE: SHEET G001 FOR ADDITIONAL GENERAL NOTES THAT ARE APPLICABLE. 2. REFERENCE SHEET G003-G004 FOR FIXTURE & ACCESSORY MOUNTING HEIGHTS & LOCATION. 3. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLAN ARE TO THE FACE OF GYP. BOARD/ WALL (FOG), FACE OF MASONRY (FOM), FACE OF CONCRETE WALLS (FOC), AND COLUMN GRID LINES, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 4. DOOR OPENINGS NOT LOCATED BY DIMENSION SHALL BE CENTERED IN WALL SHOWN OR LOCATED 4" FROM FINISH WALL TO HINGE SIDE OF THE DOOR, ALWAYS ALLOWING A MINIMUM OF 18" FROM THE PULL SIDE (STRIKE SIDE) OF THE DOOR TO THE INTERSECTING WALL, OR OTHER PROTRUDING OBJECTS. 5. ALL CLOSETS AND ALCOVES WITHOUT A SPACE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL HAVE THE SAME FINISHES AS THE ADJOINING SPACES. 6. ALL PUBLIC SPACES: WALLS WILL BE FINISHED WITH 5/8" GYP. BD. TO A LEVEL 4H ROLLER FINISH AND PAINTED, UNLESS NOTED OR SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. 7. RE: DOOR SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOOR AND DOOR FRAME FINISHES. 8. PROVIDE MINIMUM 1'-0" CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AT THE PUSH SIDE OF EVERY DOOR WITH A CLOSER. PROVIDE MINIMUM 1'-6" CLEAR AT THE PULL SIDE OF EVERY DOOR, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DIMENSIONED, NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 9. ALL WALL PARTITIONS ARE TYPE A3C INSULATED U.N.O. 10. OFOI FURNITURE SYSTEMS DASHED IN FOR CLARITY. 11. EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN: PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ. TO PROVIDE LEVEL 4 FINISH. RE: FINISH PLAN FOR WALL FINISH GENERAL NOTES FLOOR PLAN SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A111 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 PLAN NORTH TRUE NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"1 FLOOR PLAN 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 A TYPE PARTITION 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 F TYPE PARTITION PARTITION TYPE MARK STUD DEPTH FIRE RATING TESTED ASSEMBLY STC RTG SHEET NOTES A3C 3 5/8" UL U419 48 A6A 5 1/2" 1 UL U419 48 A6C 5 1/2" UL U419 48 PARTITION TYPE MARK STUD DEPTH FIRE RATING TESTED ASSEMBLY STC RTG SHEET NOTES F2C 2 1/2" F3C 3 5/8" J +36" J +3 6 " US B +1 8 " US B +1 8 " USB +18" USB +18" +1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " +18" +18" +1 8 " + 1 8 " USB +38" +1 8 " +18" +1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " +18" +1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " +4 4 " + 4 4 " + 4 4 " +4 4 " + 4 4 " +4 4 " +4 4 " + 4 4 " +1 8 " + 1 8 " +1 8 " +4 4 " +44" +4 2 " + 4 2 " + 1 8 " +42" +18" +42" +42" +18" +18" +18" +1 8 " + 1 8 " +18"+18" +1 8 " + 1 8 " +18" +18" +1 8 " US B +1 8 " USB +42" +18" +18" +18" +18" +18" +1 8 " + 1 8 " +42" +1 8 " + 1 8 " +18" +18" USB +18" US B +1 8 " +18" +1 8 " +1 8 " +18" +18" +18" +4 2 " +1 8 " + 1 8 " +18" +18" +18" +1 8 " +18" +18" +18" +42" +18" +18" +1 8 " USB +18" USB +18" US B +1 8 " US B +1 8 " +18" +18" +18" +1 8 " +1 8 " + 1 8 " +1 8 " +4 4 " +42" +1 8 " +1 8 " + 1 8 " + 1 8 " +38" +18" +1 8 " +1 8 " USB +18" +18" +1 8 " +1 8 " +18" +1 8 " +18" +18" +1 8 " +1 8 " +1 8 " +18" +18" +18" +1 8 " +1 8 " N.I.C. N.I.C. 119 EXAM 12 RE: TYP. EXAM 120 STORAGE 121 EXAM 13 RE: TYP. EXAM 122 EXAM 14 RE: TYP. EXAM 118 EXAM 11 RE: TYP. EXAM 117 EXAM 10 RE: TYP. EXAM 116 EXAM 09 RE: TYP. EXAM 115 EXAM 08 114 IT/ELEC 113 EXAM 07 RE: TYP. EXAM 110 EXAM 06 106 EXAM 03 RE: TYP. EXAM 105 EXAM 02 RE: TYP. EXAM 104 EXAM 01 111 STAFF TLT 112 BREAKROOM 127 MA STATION 109 EXAM 05 108 EXAM 04 123 EXAM 15 124 NURSING 100 WAITING 128 LAB 125 RECEPTION 107 SHARED OFFICE 103 VITALS 132 TLT 129 TLT 126 OFFICE 1' - 6" 1' - 8" 9" 130 STORAGE 102 TLT 131 EVS 101 RISER ROOM 2' - 0" 3' - 4 " 3' - 0" TYP. EXAM ROOM 3' - 6 " 3' - 4" 3' - 4" 3' - 6 " 2' - 0 " 3' - 4" 3' - 6 " 2' - 0 " 1' - 8 " 4' - 2 " 3' - 8 " 2' - 1 0 " EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ 1' - 8" 1' - 6 " 2' - 8 " EQ EQ EQ 10 " 4' - 8 " 5' - 0" 4' - 0 " 2' - 8"3' - 2"6' - 0"2' - 2"2' - 2"1' - 8" 3' - 0" 2' - 0" 3' - 4 " 1 EQ EQ 1' - 6" 3' - 0" 3' - 4 " 1' - 2"1' - 4" 2' - 5 " 1' - 4 " 8' - 1 " 1' - 4 " 2' - 0 " 1' - 8 " 1' - 4 " 1' - 4 " 1' - 4 " 4' - 1 0 " 6" 3' - 6"8" 6"8" 8' - 4 " 3' - 2 " 3' - 2" 2' - 4 " 1' - 6 " 2' - 7 1 / 2 " 2' - 7 1 / 2 " 2' - 7 1 / 2 " EQ EQ 2' - 7 1/2" 1' - 10" 5' - 0 " 4' - 4 " 2' - 8 " 3' - 7 " 4' - 1 0 " 5' - 1 0 " 6' - 1 " 3' - 1 0 " 2' - 2" 3' - 6 " EQ EQ 3' - 1 0 " 1' - 0"4' - 0"4' - 0" 2' - 0"4' - 10"2' - 4" 5' - 8 " 2' - 4 " 4' - 2" 2' - 6 " 2' - 6 " 1' - 0" 5' - 0 " 5' - 0" 5' - 0" 5' - 0" 5' - 0 " 3' - 0 " 2 1. RE: SHEET G001 FOR ADDITIONAL GENERAL NOTES THAT ARE APPLICABLE. 2. REFERENCE SHEET G003-G004 FOR FIXTURE & ACCESSORY MOUNTING HEIGHTS & LOCATION. 3. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLAN ARE TO THE FACE OF GYP. BOARD/ WALL (FOG), FACE OF MASONRY (FOM), FACE OF CONCRETE WALLS (FOC), AND COLUMN GRID LINES, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 4. DOOR OPENINGS NOT LOCATED BY DIMENSION SHALL BE CENTERED IN WALL SHOWN OR LOCATED 4" FROM FINISH WALL TO HINGE SIDE OF THE DOOR, ALWAYS ALLOWING A MINIMUM OF 18" FROM THE PULL SIDE (STRIKE SIDE) OF THE DOOR TO THE INTERSECTING WALL, OR OTHER PROTRUDING OBJECTS. 5. ALL CLOSETS AND ALCOVES WITHOUT A SPACE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL HAVE THE SAME FINISHES AS THE ADJOINING SPACES. 6. ALL PUBLIC SPACES: WALLS WILL BE FINISHED WITH 5/8" GYP. BD. TO A LEVEL 4H ROLLER FINISH AND PAINTED, UNLESS NOTED OR SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. 7. RE: DOOR SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOOR AND DOOR FRAME FINISHES. 8. PROVIDE MINIMUM 1'-0" CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AT THE PUSH SIDE OF EVERY DOOR WITH A CLOSER. PROVIDE MINIMUM 1'-6" CLEAR AT THE PULL SIDE OF EVERY DOOR, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DIMENSIONED, NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 9. ALL WALL PARTITIONS ARE TYPE A3C INSULATED U.N.O. 10. OFOI FURNITURE SYSTEMS DASHED IN FOR CLARITY. 11. EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN: PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ. TO PROVIDE LEVEL 4 FINISH. RE: FINISH PLAN FOR WALL FINISH GENERAL NOTES FLOOR PLAN CONTROLS AND TSTAT LOCATION, RE: MECH1 NOTES BY NUMBER POWER PLAN PROVIDE POWER ON BACK UP BATTERY FOR LAB REFRIGERATORS, RE: ELEC 2 SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A112 OVERALL POWER PLAN PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 PLAN NORTH TRUE NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"1 FLOOR PLAN - POWER N.I.C. N.I.C. 119 EXAM 12 120 STORAGE 121 EXAM 13 122 EXAM 14 118 EXAM 11 117 EXAM 10 116 EXAM 09 115 EXAM 08 114 IT/ELEC 113 EXAM 07 110 EXAM 06 106 EXAM 03 105 EXAM 02 104 EXAM 01 111 STAFF TLT 112 BREAKROOM 127 MA STATION 109 EXAM 05 108 EXAM 04 123 EXAM 15 124 NURSING 100 WAITING 128 LAB 125 RECEPTION 107 SHARED OFFICE 130 STORAGE 103 VITALS 132 TLT 129 TLT A121 1 SIM 126 OFFICE A121 1 SIM A121 1 SIM 102 TLT 131 EVS 101 RISER ROOM O.H. MFZ1 MRF1 CM1 MCW1 REF1 TV2 TV1 PC1 PC1 PT1 MS1 PT2 PT2 PT2 CH1 TYP. ALL EXAM ROOMS PT2 AED TYP. ALL EXAM ROOMS ST1 LB1 B02 B03 B03 B02 A121 1 SIM B04 B06 B02 B07 PRT2 SC1 PRT1 PRT2 PRT2 DH1 HS1 TYP. ALL EXAM ROOMS SH1 GD1 UCF1 SD1 SD1 SD1 SD1 LRF1 VC1 VC1 PRT2 PRT2 PRT2 BELOW BELOW TEL1 PRT3 PRT3 PRT3 SC1 ST1 SC2 OTS1 ALZ1 EC2 EC1 EC2 EC1 DT1 WS1 EW1 CH1 HS1 DT1 SD1 PT2 LOCATE ON DOOR MR2 1 3' - 8 " 3' - 8 " FURNITURE ITEM, OFOI1 NOTES BY NUMBER EQUIPMENT PLAN 1. RE: SHEET G001 FOR ADDITIONAL GENERAL NOTES THAT ARE APPLICABLE. 2. REFERENCE SHEET G003-G004 FOR FIXTURE & ACCESSORY MOUNTING HEIGHTS & LOCATION. COORDINATE ALL DOORS TO BE CLEAR OF ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT PER ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS. 3. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLAN ARE TO THE FACE OF GYP. BOARD/ WALL (FOG), FACE OF MASONRY (FOM), FACE OF CONCRETE WALLS (FOC), AND COLUMN GRID LINES, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 4. OFOI FURNITURE SYSTEMS DASHED IN FOR CLARITY. 5. PROVIDE WALL BLOCKING AS REQUIRED FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES. PROVIDE FIRE RATED BLOCK AT ANY RATED ASSEMBLIES PER SPECIFICATIONS. GENERAL NOTES EQUIPMENT PLAN SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A113 OVERALL EQUIPMENT PLAN PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 PLAN NORTH TRUE NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"1 FLOOR PLAN - EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE TYPE MARK DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL PROCUREMENT INSTALL COMMENTS AED SEMI-RECESSED AED ZOLL 1399837 PDC FACILITIES MGMT ALZ1 ANALYZER ABBOTT ID NOW PDC FACILITIES MGMT CH1 CLOTHING HOOK BOBRICK B-6777 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR CM1 COFFEE MAKER TBD TBD PDC FACILITIES MGMT PROVIDE WATER CONNECTION DH1 DOCUMENT HOLDER @ ALL EXAM ROOM DOORS TBD TBD PDC CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. DT1 DRIP TRAY HENRY SCHEIN 4370010 CCPN FACILITIES MGMT EC1 EYE CHART HENRY SCHEIN LETTERS PDC PDC EC2 EYE CHART HENRY SCHEIN PICTURES PDC PDC GD1 GLOVE DISPENSER @ ALL EXAM ROOMS MEDLINE MDS194097B PDC CONTRACTOR COORDINATE FINAL LOCATIONS WITH OWNER HS1 HAND SANIZER DISPENSER @ ALL EXAM ROOMS PURELL ES4 PDC CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. LB1 LAB BOXES AND STANDS TBD TBD FACILITIES MGMT CONTRACTOR COORDINATE WITH OWNER, PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALLS AS REQ. LRF1 UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR @ LAB SUMMIT CT661WBISSHVADA CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR MCW1 COUNTERTOP MICROWAVE @ BREAKROOM SHARP 1000 R-21LTF CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR MFZ1 FREEZER AND REFRIGERATOR STACK FOLLET FZR5P + REF5BBP PDC FACILITIES MGMT PROVIDE DEDICATED AND COVERED POWER. SEPARATE UNITS. STACK PER MANUF. REQ. MR2 WELDED-FRAME GLASS MIRROR BOBRICK B-290 2464 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR MRF1 REFRIGERATOR @ LAB FOLLET REF25-LB-L0000G PDC FACILITIES MGMT PROVIDE DEDICATED AND COVERED POWER. MS1 MOP SHELF BOBRICK B-224X36 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE TYPE MARK DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL PROCUREMENT INSTALL COMMENTS OTS1 OTOSCOPE WELCH ALLYN 25020A PDC FACILITIES MGMT PRT1 PRINT / SCAN / COPY CANON ADVANCED C4400 IT/IS IT/IS COORDINATE WITH OWNER PRT2 PRINTER HP E50145 IT/IS IT/IS PRT3 LABEL PRINTER TBD TBD IT/IS IT/IS REF1 REFRIGERATOR @ BREAKROOM GE GFE24JYKFS CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR PROVIDE WATER CONNECTION SC1 STANDING DIGITAL SCALE HEALTH-O-METER 349KLX PDC PDC COORDINATE WITH OWNER SC2 PEDIATRIC SCALE HEALTH-O-METER 553KL PDC PDC COORDINATE WITH OWNER SH1 SHARPS CONTAINER @ ALL EXAM ROOMS CARDINAL HEALTH 85165H PDC CONTRACTOR ST1 STADIOMETER @ VITALS HEALTH-O-METER 205HR PDC CONTRACTOR COORDINATE WITH OWNER TEL1 WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE TBD TBD TV1 TV MOUNT PEERLESS ST650 (P) IT/IS CONTRACTOR COORDINATE WITH OWNER, PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALLS AS REQ. TV2 TV @ WAITING SAMSUNG UN55AU8000F IT/IS IT/IS UCF1 UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR @BREAKROOM SUMMIT ALFZ37BSSTB COORDINATE CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS WITH MILLWORK PER MANUF. VC1 VACCINE COMPUTERS @LAB TBD TBD IT/IS IT/IS PROVIDE POWER AND DATA WS1 WIRE SHELVING NEXEL A24547C5 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE TYPE MARK DESCRIPTION MFR MODEL PROCUREMEN T INSTALL COMMENTS GB1 GRAB BAR BOBRICK B-6806-42 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. GB2 GRAB BAR BOBRICK B-6806x36 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. MR1 WELDED-FRAME GLASS MIRROR BOBRICK B-290 2436 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. PC1 PASS-THROUGH CABINET AMERICAN SPECIALTIES 8154 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE EQUIPMENT PLAN FOR LOCATIONS. COORDINATE MODEL WITH WALL THICKNESS PT1 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER GEORGIA PACIFIC ENMOTION 59466 PDC CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ., PROVIDE POWER FOR AUTO SENSOR, RE: ELEC PT2 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER (STAFF) BOBRICK B-26212 PDC CONTRACTOR <varies> SD1 SOAP DISPENSER PROVON ADX-12, 8871-06 PDC CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. TT1 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER BOBRICK B-2840 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE MARK DESCRIPTION MFR MODEL COMMENTS B01 LAVATORY WITH ADA APRON @ TLT AMERICAN STANDARD 0958.008EC / 0062.00EC FAUCET: AMERICAN STANDARD 6540.170 B02 SINK @ HANDWASH STATIONS ELKAY LRAD221965 FAUCET: AMERICAN STANDARD 6540.170 B03 SINK @ LAB ELKAY LRAD221965 FAUCET: SPEAKMAN SEF-1800-CA B04 SINK @ BREAKROOM ELKAY LRAD2522653 FAUCET: AMERICAN STANDARD 6540.170 B05 TOILET AMERICAN STANDARD 3043.001 FLUSH VALVE: SLOAN 111-1.28 | TOILET SEAT: CHURCH COMMERICAL: 295SSCT B06 DRINKING FOUNTAIN TBD TBD B07 MOP SINK FIAT TSB3010 FAUCET: T&S B-0665-BSTR EW1 FAUCET EMERGENCY EYEWASH SPEAKMAN SEF-1800-CA 1. RE: SHEET G001 FOR ADDITIONAL GENERAL NOTES THAT ARE APPLICABLE. 2. REFERENCE SHEET G003-G004 FOR FIXTURE & ACCESSORY MOUNTING HEIGHTS & LOCATION. 3. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLAN ARE TO THE FACE OF GYP. BOARD/ WALL (FOG), FACE OF MASONRY (FOM), FACE OF CONCRETE WALLS (FOC), AND COLUMN GRID LINES, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 4. DOOR OPENINGS NOT LOCATED BY DIMENSION SHALL BE CENTERED IN WALL SHOWN OR LOCATED 4" FROM FINISH WALL TO HINGE SIDE OF THE DOOR, ALWAYS ALLOWING A MINIMUM OF 18" FROM THE PULL SIDE (STRIKE SIDE) OF THE DOOR TO THE INTERSECTING WALL, OR OTHER PROTRUDING OBJECTS. 5. ALL CLOSETS AND ALCOVES WITHOUT A SPACE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL HAVE THE SAME FINISHES AS THE ADJOINING SPACES. 6. ALL PUBLIC SPACES: WALLS WILL BE FINISHED WITH 5/8" GYP. BD. TO A LEVEL 4H ROLLER FINISH AND PAINTED, UNLESS NOTED OR SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. 7. RE: DOOR SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOOR AND DOOR FRAME FINISHES. 8. PROVIDE MINIMUM 1'-0" CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AT THE PUSH SIDE OF EVERY DOOR WITH A CLOSER. PROVIDE MINIMUM 1'-6" CLEAR AT THE PULL SIDE OF EVERY DOOR, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DIMENSIONED, NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 9. ALL WALL PARTITIONS ARE TYPE A3C INSULATED U.N.O. 10. OFOI FURNITURE SYSTEMS DASHED IN FOR CLARITY. 11. EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN: PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ. TO PROVIDE LEVEL 4 FINISH. RE: FINISH PLAN FOR WALL FINISH GENERAL NOTES FLOOR PLAN DOOR, RE: /1 A111 RE : P L A N RE: PLAN 2/A121 3/ A 1 2 1 4/A121 5/ A 1 2 1 1' - 4 " TT1 GB1 GB2 PC1 MR1 SD1 EQ EQ PT2 B01 B05 FLOOR DRAIN, RE: PLUMBING 3' - 0 5/8" RE: PLAN FOR LOCATIONS RE: PLAN B05 TT1 GB1 GB2 IRL6 PT29E RBC39 RE: PLAN MR1 B01 PC1 GB2 GB1 B05 VANITY LIGHT EQ EQ IRL6 PT29E RBC39 3' - 1 0 " RE: EQUIPMENT PLAN FOR LOCATIONS RE: EQUIP PLAN RE: PLAN MR1 B01 SD1 IRL6 PT29E RBC39 RE: PLAN IRL6 PT29E RBC39 MULL-IT-OVER CAP BY MANUF. @ 60 STC RATING. GC TO COORD. SIZE WITH MANUF. INTUMESCENT LAYER FOR 1HR RATING PER MANUF. SOUND DEADENING COMPOSITE BY MANUF. FIRE CAULKING F3 C CONTINUOUS GYP. LAYER 1 1/2" OPACITY FILM ON INTERIOR SIDE OF EXISTING STOREFRONT A6A OPACITY FILM ON INTERIOR SIDE OF EXISTING STOREFRONT N.I.C. NIC MULL-IT-OVER CAP BY MANUF. @ 60 STC RATING. GC TO COORD. SIZE WITH MFR. INTUMESCENT LAYER FOR 1HR RATING PER MANUF. SOUND DEADENING COMPOSITE BY MANUF. CONTINUOUS GYP. LAYER EXISTING STOREFRONT 2" F3 C A6A OPACITY FILM ON INTERIOR SIDE OF EXISTING STOREFRONT MULL-IT-OVER CAP BY MANUF. @ 60 STC RATING. GC TO COORD. SIZE WITH MANUF. SOUND DEADENING COMPOSITE BY MANUF. OPACITY FILM ON INTERIOR SIDE OF EXISTING STOREFRONT F3C A3 C 2" MULL-IT-OVER CAP BY MANUF. @ 60 STC RATING. GC TO COORD. SIZE WITH MANUF. SOUND DEADENING COMPOSITE BY MANUF. DOOR AS SCHED. EXISTING STOREFRONT F2 C F2C F2 C F2C EXISTING COLUMN GYP. BD. CORNER GUARD AS SCHED. 1. RE: SHEET G001 FOR ADDITIONAL GENERAL NOTES THAT ARE APPLICABLE. 2. RE: SHEET G003/4 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES. 3. RE: FINISH LEGEND AND FINISH SCHEDULE FOR SPECIFIC FINISH INFORMATION AND LOCATIONS. 4. WALL FINISHES SHOWN ARE FOR ACCENT CLARIFICATION ONLY. RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN AND FINISH LEGEND FOR ADDITIONAL ROOM FINISHES. 5. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD CONTROL JOINTS AT DOOR HEADERS WHERE GYPSUM BOARD EXCEEDS 30 FEET (TYP.), UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. JOINTS TO BE LINED UP WITH BOTH SIDES OF DOOR FRAMES FOR DOORS 4'-0" AND OVER AND ALL DOORS THAT ARE LEAD LINED. 6. ALIGN ALL WALL TILE JOINTS WITH FLOOR TILE JOINTS, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 7. TRANSITION ALL WALL AND BASE FINISHES, AND/ OR COLOR CHANGES AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONSULT ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION, IF NECESSARY. 8. CONTINUE WALL FINISH AS SCHEDULED BEHIND ALL FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING UNDER OPEN COUNTERS. 9. CONTINUE WALL BASE AT ALL WALLS, FURRED OUT COLUMNS & COLUMN COVERS, AND AT ALL CASEWORK TOE KICKS, SIDE PANELS, AND UNDER OPEN COUNTERS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO MILLWORK/ CASEWORK FABRICATION & INSTALLATION. 11. ALL MILLWORK/CASEWORK CONSTRUCTION SHALL MEET AWI PREMIUM STANDARDS, UNLESS NOTED OR SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. 12. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE & INSTALL GROMMETS AT 48” O.C. MAX. AT ALL WORK STATIONS WITH OPEN KNEE SPACE. COORDINATE LOCATIONS DIRECTLY WITH ELECTRICAL/DATA DRAWINGS FOR OUTLET LOCATIONS. COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. 13. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONCEALED COUNTERTOP BRACKETS AT OPEN KNEE SPACES WIDER THAN 42” (TYP.). CENTER IN OPEN AREA AND PAINT TO MATCH WALL COLOR, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 14. ALL EXPOSED CASEWORK/MILLWORK SURFACES SHALL BE FINISHED TO MATCH ADJACENT PLASTIC LAMINATE SURFACES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 15. ALL FILLER PANELS SHALL BE FINISHES TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES AND SCRIBED TO FIT ADJACENT WALL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 16. RE: EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS & SPECS. FOR EQUIPMENT ITEMS SHOWN DASHED, PROVIDED BY EQUIP. CONSULTANT AND/ OR SUPPLIED BY OWNER. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES AS NECESSARY. 17. MECH. & ELEC. SYMBOLS AND OUTLETS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH MEP DRAWINGS. CONSULT ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION, IF NECESSARY. GENERAL NOTES INTERIOR ELEVS SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A121 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN & PLAN DETAILS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 1/2" = 1'-0"1 ENLARGED PLAN - TYP. RESTROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"2 INT. ELEV - TYP. RESTROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"3 INT. ELEV - TYP. RESTROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"4 INT. ELEV - TYP. RESTROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"5 INT. ELEV - TYP. RESTROOM TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE TYPE MARK DESCRIPTION MFR MODEL PROCUREMEN T INSTALL COMMENTS GB1 GRAB BAR BOBRICK B-6806-42 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. GB2 GRAB BAR BOBRICK B-6806x36 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. MR1 WELDED-FRAME GLASS MIRROR BOBRICK B-290 2436 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. PC1 PASS-THROUGH CABINET AMERICAN SPECIALTIES 8154 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE EQUIPMENT PLAN FOR LOCATIONS. COORDINATE MODEL WITH WALL THICKNESS PT1 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER GEORGIA PACIFIC ENMOTION 59466 PDC CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ., PROVIDE POWER FOR AUTO SENSOR, RE: ELEC PT2 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER (STAFF) BOBRICK B-26212 PDC CONTRACTOR <varies> SD1 SOAP DISPENSER PROVON ADX-12, 8871-06 PDC CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. TT1 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER BOBRICK B-2840 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR PROVIDE FR BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQ. 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6 PLAN DETAIL - WALL AT GLAZING 1 1/2" = 1'-0"8 PLAN DETAIL - WALL AT GLAZING 1 1/2" = 1'-0"7 PLAN DETAIL - WALL AT GLAZING 1 1/2" = 1'-0"9 PLAN DETAIL - WALL AT GLAZING PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE MARK DESCRIPTION MFR MODEL COMMENTS B01 LAVATORY WITH ADA APRON @ TLT AMERICAN STANDARD 0958.008EC / 0062.00EC FAUCET: AMERICAN STANDARD 6540.170 B02 SINK @ HANDWASH STATIONS ELKAY LRAD221965 FAUCET: AMERICAN STANDARD 6540.170 B03 SINK @ LAB ELKAY LRAD221965 FAUCET: SPEAKMAN SEF-1800-CA B04 SINK @ BREAKROOM ELKAY LRAD2522653 FAUCET: AMERICAN STANDARD 6540.170 B05 TOILET AMERICAN STANDARD 3043.001 FLUSH VALVE: SLOAN 111-1.28 | TOILET SEAT: CHURCH COMMERICAL: 295SSCT B06 DRINKING FOUNTAIN TBD TBD B07 MOP SINK FIAT TSB3010 FAUCET: T&S B-0665-BSTR EW1 FAUCET EMERGENCY EYEWASH SPEAKMAN SEF-1800-CA 1 1/2" = 1'-0"10 PLAN DETAIL - COLUMN WRAP HARDWARE SCHEDULE QTY HARDWARE SET 1.0 DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 Hinge, Full Mortise, Hvy Wt T4A3386 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"US32D MK Notes: Door normally closed and locked. When valid pin code is entered at keypad door will unlock allowing ingress. Free egress at all times. DOORS: 133 DESCRIPTION: SGL EXT KEYPAD - CLOSER W STOP 1 Access Control Cyl Lock B AU NTB613-NR 626 YA 1 Drop Plate 3148 689 YA 1 Surface Closer 2731T 689 YA 1 Gasketing 316AV PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Width of Frame Head PE 1 Sweep 345AV x Length Required PE 1 Threshold 2009APK x Length Required x MSES25SS PE 1 SFIC Core x Type Required 626 BE QTY HARDWARE SET 2.0 DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"US26D MK DOORS: 114, 120, 130, 131 DESCRIPTION: SGL STORAGE - CLOSER W WALL STOP 1 Storeroom or Closet Lock B AU 4705LN 626 YA 1 Surface Closer 2701 689 YA 1 Wall Stop 409 US26D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 SFIC Core x Type Required 626 BE QTY HARDWARE SET 3.0 DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"US26D MK DOORS: 107, 126 DESCRIPTION: SGL OFFICE - CLOSER W WALL STOP 1 Entry Lock B AU 4707LN 626 YA 1 Surface Closer 2701 689 YA 1 Wall Stop 409 US26D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 SFIC Core x Type Required 626 BE QTY HARDWARE SET 4.0 DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"US26D MK Notes: Doors normally closed and secured. Push button at reception desk allowing for ingress for users without valid credentials after signing in/out with reception. DOORS: 100A, 100B DESCRIPTION: SGL CLASSROOM - ELECTRIC STRIKE W CLOSER 1 Storeroom or Closet Lock B AU 4705LN 626 YA 1 Electric Strike 1500C 630 HS 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 3 Surface Closer 2701 YA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10”x 2”LDW US26D RO 689 1 Wall Stop 409 US26D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C**** x Length Required MK 1 Power Supply AQD1 SU 1 Wiring Diagram Elevation and Point to Point as Specified OT 1 Push Button Release Provided by Other OT 1 SFIC Core x Type Required BE626 QTY HARDWARE SET 5.0 DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"US26D MK DOORS: 102, 111, 124, 129, 132 DESCRIPTION: SGL PRIVACY - CLOSER W WALL STOP 1 Privacy AU YPL02 626 YA 1 Surface Closer 2701 689 YA 1 Wall Stop 409 US26D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO QTY HARDWARE SET 6.0 DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"US26D MK DOORS: 104, 105, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 121, 122, 123 DESCRIPTION: SGL PASSAGE - WALL STOP 1 Passage Latch AU 4701LN 626 YA 1 Wall Stop 409 US26D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO QTY HARDWARE SET 7.0 DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"US26D MK DOORS: 125 DESCRIPTION: SGL PASSAGE - CLOSER W WALL STOP 1 Passage Latch AU 4701LN 626 YA 1 Wall Stop 409 US26D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 Surface Closer 2701 689 YA QTY HARDWARE SET 8.0 DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"US26D MK DOORS: 112 DESCRIPTION: SGL PASSAGE - OVERHEAD STOP 1 Passage Latch AU 4701LN 626 YA 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 Surf Overhead Stop 10-x36 652 RF PE R S C H E D U L E PER SCHEDULE F DOOR TYPESSINGLE DOOR DOUBLE DOOR FF PE R S C H E D U L E PER SCHEDULE NV2 4"6" 10 " 2' - 0 " 8" VA R I E S 6" RE: SCHED 4" 4" 4" 10 " GF T T PE R S C H E D U L E TY P . 2" 2" TYP. PER SCHEDULE FRAME TYPESF1 PE R S C H E D U L E 2" 2" PER SCHEDULE F2 RE: PLAN T A 4"1/2" 1/2" 4"1/2" 1/2" 1/ 2 " 2" PE R W A L L T Y P E DOOR AS SCHED. HM DOOR FRAME 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS @ 16-INCHES O.C. INTERIOR 5/8-INCH TYPE X GYP. BD. 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS @ 16-INCHES O.C. HM DOOR FRAME DOOR AS SCHED. INTERIOR 5/8-INCH TYPE X GYP. BD. PER WALL TYPE 2"2"1/ 2 " 2" 1/2" HM DOOR FRAME 3 5/8-INCH BOX BEAM HEADER INTERIOR 5/8-INCH TYPE X GYP. BD. 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS @ 16- INCHES O.C. DOOR AS SCHED. 1. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL DOOR AND DOOR HARDWARE INFORMATION. 2. G.C. TO COORDINATE AND REVIEW ALL HARDWARE SUBMITTALS WITH ARCHITECT AND TENANT PRIOR TO PLACING DOOR HARDWARE ORDER. 3. ALL DOORS AND DOOR HARDWARE SHALL BE INSTALLED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS. 4. SHOULD A MODIFICATION TO A RATED FRAME BE REQUIRED, NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING RATED FRAMES ARE UNACCEPTABLE. 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL DOORS AND FRAMES PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 6. G.C. TO COORDINATE KEY SCHEDULE (IE: MASTER | SUB-MASTER) WITH BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND TENANT. 7. RE-KEY EXISTING HARDWARE TO COORDINATE WITH NEW HARDWARE. 8. ALL CLOSERS SHALL BE CONCEALED IN FRAME OR OVERHEAD U.N.O. RE: SCHED. 9. ADJUST ALL CLOSERS TO MEET ADAAG/TAS GUIDELINES. 10. CONTRACTOR TO ENSURE DRYWALL EDGE AND STUD ARE NOT EXPOSED AT DOOR STRIKE LOCATIONS. 11. CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL PANIC HARDWARE/FIRE EXIT DEVICES AS REQUIRED BY CODE. 12. WD REFERS TO SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR, RE: SPECIFICATIONS RE: FINISH LEGEND FOR DOOR FINISH. 13. FINISH OF HM DOOR FRAMES TO BE PT135E U.N.O. RE: FINISH LEGEND. GENERAL NOTES DOORS T.O DOOR FRAME RE: DOOR SCHEDULE FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION RE: PLAN BACKER ROD AND SEALENT, BOTH SIDES 1/4" SHIM (AS REQ.) ALUM. THRESHOLD SET IN FULL BED OF MASTIC DRIP EDGE HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAME, PAINTED 4 1/2" 1/ 4 " M A X . FLEXIBLE FLASHING MEMBRANE TO CREATE CONTINUOUS WATER TIGHT CONDITION TO ENGAGE MULLION HEAD, JAMB AND SILLS, TYP. SLOPE BUILDING SLAB 1/4" PER FOOT IN CONDITIONS WHERE STOREFRONT IS HELD BACK. COORD. PRIOR TO POURING BUILDING SLAB MA X . 1/ 4 " D R O P 4 1/2" 1/ 4 " M A X . EXISTING EXTERIOR ASSEMBLY FLASHING AS REQ. IN EXISTING ASSEMBLY SLOPE SIDEWALK 1/4" PER FT. FOR 5'-0" FROM DOOR DOOR LEGEND T 1/4" TEMPERED GLASS A FROST FILM 'F1' RE: FINISH LEGEND FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION RE: PLAN MA X 1/ 4 " D R O P SLOPE SIDEWALK 1/4" PER FT. FOR 5'-0" FROM DOOR 1" INSULATED GLASS, RE: SPECS ALUM. THRESHOLD SET IN FULL BED OF MASTIC BACKER ROD AND SEALENT, BOTH SIDES 1/ 4 " M A X 1" INSULATED TEMPERED GLASS T.O. DOOR FRAME RE: DOOR SCHEDULE WEATHER STRIP AS REQ. WEATHER STRIP AS REQ. FLEXIBLE FLASHING MEMBRANE TO CREATE CONTINUOUS WATER TIGHT CONDITION TO ENGAGE MULLION HEAD, JAMB AND SILLS, TYP. SLOPE BUILDING SLAB 1/4" PER FOOT IN CONDITIONS WHERE STOREFRONT IS HELD BACK. COORD. PRIOR TO POURING BUILDING SLAB 1/ 4 " M A X 1/4" SHIM (AS REQ.) EXISTING EXTERIOR ASSEMBLY FLASHING AS REQ. IN EXISTING ASSEMBLY BACKER ROD AND SEALENT, BOTH SIDES 1/4" SHIM (AS REQ.) HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAME, PAINTED 4 1/2" FLEXIBLE FLASHING MEMBRANE TO CREATE CONTINUOUS WATER TIGHT CONDITION TO ENGAGE MULLION HEAD, JAMB AND SILLS, TYP. 4 1/2" EXISTING EXTERIOR ASSEMBLY CONTINUOUS WEATHER BARRIER FROM EXISTING ASSEMBLY TO WRAP NEW JAMB CORNER 1" INSULATED TEMPERED GLASS WEATHER STRIP AS REQ. FLEXIBLE FLASHING MEMBRANE TO CREATE CONTINUOUS WATER TIGHT CONDITION TO ENGAGE MULLION HEAD, JAMB AND SILLS, TYP. 1/4" SHIM (AS REQ.) EXISTING EXTERIOR ASSEMBLY CONTINUOUS WEATHER BARRIER FROM EXISTING ASSEMBLY TO WRAP NEW JAMB CORNER SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A511 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 HM DOOR JAMB - TYP. 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1 HM DOOR HEAD - TYP. DOOR SCHEDULE MARK ROOM DOOR DOOR FRAME RATING DETAILS HARDWARE REMARKSWIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL TYPE MATERIAL TYPE HEAD JAMB 100A WAITING 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD NV2 HM F2 -- 1/A511 2/A511 4.0 1 100B WAITING 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD NV2 HM F2 -- 1/A511 2/A511 4.0 1 101 RISER ROOM 3' - 0" 7' - 0" HM F HM F1 -- 3/A511 5/A511 - 4,5,6 102 TLT 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 5.0 104 EXAM 01 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 105 EXAM 02 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 106 EXAM 03 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 107 SHARED OFFICE 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 3.0 108 EXAM 04 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 109 EXAM 05 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 110 EXAM 06 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 111 STAFF TLT 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 5.0 112 BREAKROOM 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 8.0 113 EXAM 07 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 114 IT/ELEC 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 2.0 115 EXAM 08 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 116 EXAM 09 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 117 EXAM 10 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 118 EXAM 11 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 119 EXAM 12 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 120 STORAGE 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 2.0 121 EXAM 13 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 122 EXAM 14 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 123 EXAM 15 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 6.0 124 NURSING 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 5.0 125 RECEPTION 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 7.0 126 OFFICE 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 3.0 129 TLT 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 5.0 130 STORAGE 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 2.0 131 EVS 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 2.0 132 TLT 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD F HM F1 -- 1/A511 2/A511 5.0 133 EXTERIOR 3' - 0" 7' - 0" AL GF AL F1 -- 4/A511 6/A511 1.0 2,3,6 DOOR SCHEDULE REMARKS: 1. REMOTE RELEASE BELOW RECEPTION COUNTER. 2. ACCESSED FROM EXTERIOR VIA KEYPAD LOCK. 3. AL DOOR AND FRAME FINISH TO BE CLEAR ANODIZED. 4. HM DOOR FRAME TO BE PT09, RE: FINISH LEGEND. 5. COORDINATE HARDWARE WITH LANDLORD 6. PROVIDE AS SEPARATE LINE ITEM ,RE: SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES 3" = 1'-0"3 HM DOOR HEAD/SILL EXTERIOR 3" = 1'-0"4 AL DOOR HEAD/SILL EXTERIOR 3" = 1'-0"5 HM DOOR JAMB EXTERIOR 3" = 1'-0"6 AL DOOR JAMB EXTERIOR DETAIL 1. RE: SHEET G001 FOR ADDITIONAL GENERAL NOTES THAT ARE APPLICABLE. 2. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS ARE TO THE FACE OF GYP. BOARD (FOG), AND COLUMN GRID LINES, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 3. ALL ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS TO BE 9'-0" A.F.F., UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 4. ALL CEILING HEIGHTS AS SHOWN ON PLANS AND DETAILS ARE FROM SLAB OR TILE FLOOR (FINISHED FLOOR) TO FINISH CEILING. 5. AT ALL GYP. BD. SOFFITS: EXTEND GYP. BD. UP 6 INCHES ABOVE ADJACENT CEILING. 6. RE: DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS AND CEILING HEIGHT INFORMATION. 7. RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN AND FINISH LEGEND FOR ROOM CEILING FINISHES. 8. CEILING TILES/GRID TO BE CENTERED IN THE ROOM, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 9. RECESSED LIGHTING, SPEAKERS, SMOKE DETECTORS, ETC. AND PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURES - SHALL BE CENTERED IN CEILING TILE OR GYP. BD. CEILING, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 10. RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATION OF WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES. 11. RE: ELECTRICAL SHEETS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE. 12. RE: MECHANICAL SHEETS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON DIFFUSERS. 13. COORDINATE ALL CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT WITH CASEWORK BELOW. 14. IF THERE IS A CONFLICT BETWEEN ANY ABOVE- CEILING MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL / PLUMBING WORK & THE SCHEDULED OR SHOWN CEILING HEIGHT, CONTACT THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY FOR CLARIFICATION 16. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPARE THIS REFLECTED CEILING PLAN WITH ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLANS, MECHANICAL SUPPLY, RETURN, AND EXHAUST PLANS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPORT ANY OMISSIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES TO THE ARCHITECT. 17. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR THE LOCATIONS OF CEILING MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS, SPEAKERS, NURSE CALL DOME LIGHTS, EXIT SIGNAGE, FIRE ALARM DEVICES, WALL MOUNTED EXIT LIGHTS, ETC. 18. FOR FURTHER DIMENSIONS SEE LARGE SCALE PLANS, SECTIONS, ELEVATIONS, AND DETAILS. 19. COORDINATE GYPSUM BOARD FURR DOWN HEIGHTS WITH FULL HEIGHT CABINETS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. GENERAL NOTES RCP CEILING TYPE SUPPLY AIR GRILLE REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SUSPENDED 2' X 2' ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM CEILING DETAIL / SECTION TAG GYPSUM BOARD CEILING RETURN AIR GRILLE REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 A101 SIM RCP LEGEND LIGHT FIXTURE RECESSED CAN, RE: ELEC. 2X2 LIGHT FIXTURE DIRECT/INDIRECT, RE: ELEC. ITEM DESCRIPTION 2X4 LIGHT FIXTURE DIRECT/INDIRECT, RE: ELEC. EXIT SIGN UNDER CABINET LIGHTING, RE: ELEC. XXX X' -X"CEILING HEIGHT PROVIDE 3 1/2" BATT INSULATION ABOVE CEILING IN ENTIRE ROOM WHERE INDICATED 1 EXISTING ROOF HATCH ABOVE CEILING. PRESERVE ACCESS. GC TO DESIGN BUILD JOIST PLATFORM FOR ROOF HATCH ACCESS. 2 NOTES BY NUMBER RCP 3 DELEGATED DESIGN - GC TO COORDINATE WOOD OR CFMF PLATFORM ABOVE CEILING TO PROVIDE ACCESS TO EXISTING ROOF HATCH WITH A DEAD LOAD OF 30 PSF AND A LIVE LOAD OF 50 PSF PERFORMANCE CRITERIA. 1 ACT 10' -0" GYP 8' -6" ACT 8' -6" 8' - 4" 8' - 10" ACT 8' -6" EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ N.I.C. N.I.C. 8' - 4" 8' - 4" GYP 8' -0" GYP 7' -10" GYP 8' -0" EQ EQ EQ EQ 3' - 6 7 / 8 " 4' - 5 1/8" EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ 18' - 0" 30 ' - 0 " 2' - 3 " 3' - 7 1 / 8 " 2' - 3" EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ 2' - 0 " EQ EQ EQ EQ 3' - 4 " EQ EQ EQ EQ 1' - 7 3/4" GYP 7' -2" GYP 8' -0" GYP 9' -6" 8' - 10" 8' - 10" 119 EXAM 12 120 STORAGE 121 EXAM 13 122 EXAM 14 118 EXAM 11 117 EXAM 10 116 EXAM 09 115 EXAM 08 114 IT/ELEC 113 EXAM 07 110 EXAM 06 106 EXAM 03 105 EXAM 02 104 EXAM 01 111 STAFF TLT 112 BREAKROOM 127 MA STATION 109 EXAM 05 108 EXAM 04 123 EXAM 15 124 NURSING 100 WAITING 128 LAB 125 RECEPTION 107 SHARED OFFICE 103 VITALS 132 TLT 129 TLT 126 OFFICE GYP 8' -0" ACT 9' -1" E Q E Q 3' - 6" 2' - 0" EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ 7' - 0 " 2' - 2"2' - 2" EQ EQ 1' - 8 " 1' - 8 " 1' - 8"1' - 8" 1' - 8 " 1' - 8 " EQ EQ 1' - 4 " 130 STORAGE 102 TLT 131 EVS 101 RISER ROOM 1' - 8 " 1' - 8 " EQ EQ 7 A631 7 A631 5 A631 5 A631 7 A631 8 A631 7 A631 5 A631 3 A631 3 A631 3 A631 3 A631 EQ EQ 8 A631 5 A631 1 1 111 1 1111111 1 1 4 A631 4 A631 9 A631 6 A631 4' - 0"4' - 0" EQ EQ GYP 8' -10" 8 A631 5 A631 7 A631 6 A631 5 A631 6 A631 6 A631 GYP 7' -10" EQ EQ EQ EQ 2 AL I G N ALIGN 5 A631 GYP 9' -6" 8 A631 7 A631 7 A631 7 A631 5 A631 3 A631 7 A631 7 A631 13' - 3 1/2" ALIGN ALIGN AL I G N 2' - 0"2' - 0 " 2' - 0 " OTS OTS GYP 9' -0" 8' - 10" 8' - 10" 2' - 0 " OTS GYP 9' -0" GYP 9' -0" GYP 9' -0" 5 A631 3 EQ EQ 2' - 0 " 3' - 6 7 / 8 " GYP 8' -6" GYP 8' -6"GYP 8' -0" 2' - 6 " 1' - 8" 1' - 8 " 2' - 6" 2' - 6" 1' - 8 " 2' - 6" 1' - 8 " SIM 5 A631 SIM 2X2 / 2X4 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION LAY-IN MOUNTING LITHONIA LIGHTING MFR 2BLT4 TYPE TYPICAL 2X4 PROVIDE 2X2 IN WAITING COMMENTS RECESSED CAN LIGHTS RECESSED LITHONIA LIGHTING 6JBK RD TYPICAL 6" CAN LIGHT IN GYP CEILING SEMI-RECESSED DECORATIVE CAN LIGHT RECESSED - -PROVIDE ALLOWANCE FOR (5) DECORATIVE FIXTURES AT RECEPTION DESK LED LIGHT FIXTURE SUSPENDED LITHONIA LIGHTING CLX PROVIDE AT EVS AND IT/ELEC UNDERCABINET LED LIGHT FIXTURE MOUNTED LITHONIA LIGHTING UCEL TYPICAL UNDER CABINET LIGHT FIXTURE @ LENGTH OF UPPER CABINETS WHERE INDICATED ON RCP WALL MOUNTED LED LIGHT FIXTURE MOUNTED ASL DOV PROVIDE (1) FIXTURE ABOVE MIRROR IN ALL TOILET ROOMS, RE: A121 SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A611 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 PLAN NORTH TRUE NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN MI N . 6" BRACE TO STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED PER R.C.P. AFF PER R.C.P. AFF MI N . 6" 1"1" CEILING AS SCHED. INTERIOR 5/8-INCH TYPE X GYP. BD. CEILING AS SCHED. 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS @ 16-INCHES O.C. MI N . 6" WALL PER SCHEDULE PER R.C.P. PER R.C.P. LIGHT WHERE APPLICABLE: RE. MEP CEILING AS SCHED. 5/8" GYP. BD. OVER METAL STUDS 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS @ 16-INCHES O.C. MI N . 6" PER R.C.P. MI N . 6" PER R.C.P. PER R.C.P. PER R.C.P. BRACE TO STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED CEILING AS SCHED.CEILING AS SCHED. 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS @ 16- INCHES O.C. INTERIOR 5/8-INCH TYPE X GYP. BD. PER R.C.P. AFF PARTITION AS SCHED. CEILING AS SCHED. METAL EDGE TRIM LOOSE BATT INSULATION ON ACT AS INDICATED IN RCP NOTES HUNG CEILING WIRE PER MFR.PARTITION AS SCHED. RE: FLOOR PLAN PER R.C.P. INT. GYP. CEILING AS SCHED. HUNG CEILING WIRE PER MFR. RE : R C P RE : I N T . E L E V A T I O N S PARTITION AS SCHED. RE: FLOOR PLAN 5/8" GYP. BD. OVER METAL STUDS BUILT IN CASEWORK RE: ELEVATION CEILING AS SCHED. BRACE AS REQD. PER R.C.P. VERIFY PER CASEWORK VENDOR U.N.O 1" 4" VERIFY PER CASEWORK VENDOR VERIFY W/CASEWORK DIM 1" PE R I N T . EL E V A T I O N CASEWORK PER INT. ELEVATION PARTITION AS SCHED. RE: FLOOR PLAN 5/8" GYP. BD. OVER METAL STUDS BUILT IN CASEWORK RE: ELEVATION BRACE AS REQD. 5/8" GYP. BD. OVER METAL STUDS WP01-A MI N . 6" RE: RCP CEILING AS SCHED. 5/8" GYP. BD. OVER METAL STUDS 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS @ 16-INCHES O.C. PER R.C.P. PER R.C.P. PER R.C.P PER R.C.P INTERIOR 5/8-INCH TYPE X GYP. BD. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING W/ EXPOSED GRID TRANSITION MOLDING PER ACT MFR. ROLLER SHADE RE: RCP FOR LOCATIONS AND COORD. WITH MFR. FOR ROLLER SHADE HOUSING SIZE PER R.C.P. CEILING AS SCHED. SUSPENSION WALL ANGLE EXISTING STOREFRONT EXISTING WALL ASSEMBLY FIRE RETARDANT WD BLOCKING HUNG CEILING WIRE PER MFR. ALIGN 1. RE: SHEET G001 FOR ADDITIONAL GENERAL NOTES THAT ARE APPLICABLE. 2. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS ARE TO THE FACE OF GYP. BOARD (FOG), AND COLUMN GRID LINES, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 3. ALL ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS TO BE 9'-0" A.F.F., UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 4. ALL CEILING HEIGHTS AS SHOWN ON PLANS AND DETAILS ARE FROM SLAB OR TILE FLOOR (FINISHED FLOOR) TO FINISH CEILING. 5. AT ALL GYP. BD. SOFFITS: EXTEND GYP. BD. UP 6 INCHES ABOVE ADJACENT CEILING. 6. RE: DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS AND CEILING HEIGHT INFORMATION. 7. RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN AND FINISH LEGEND FOR ROOM CEILING FINISHES. 8. CEILING TILES/GRID TO BE CENTERED IN THE ROOM, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 9. RECESSED LIGHTING, SPEAKERS, SMOKE DETECTORS, ETC. AND PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURES - SHALL BE CENTERED IN CEILING TILE OR GYP. BD. CEILING, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 10. RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATION OF WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES. 11. RE: ELECTRICAL SHEETS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE. 12. RE: MECHANICAL SHEETS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON DIFFUSERS. 13. COORDINATE ALL CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT WITH CASEWORK BELOW. 14. IF THERE IS A CONFLICT BETWEEN ANY ABOVE- CEILING MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL / PLUMBING WORK & THE SCHEDULED OR SHOWN CEILING HEIGHT, CONTACT THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY FOR CLARIFICATION 16. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPARE THIS REFLECTED CEILING PLAN WITH ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLANS, MECHANICAL SUPPLY, RETURN, AND EXHAUST PLANS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPORT ANY OMISSIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES TO THE ARCHITECT. 17. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR THE LOCATIONS OF CEILING MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS, SPEAKERS, NURSE CALL DOME LIGHTS, EXIT SIGNAGE, FIRE ALARM DEVICES, WALL MOUNTED EXIT LIGHTS, ETC. 18. FOR FURTHER DIMENSIONS SEE LARGE SCALE PLANS, SECTIONS, ELEVATIONS, AND DETAILS. 19. COORDINATE GYPSUM BOARD FURR DOWN HEIGHTS WITH FULL HEIGHT CABINETS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. GENERAL NOTES RCP SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A631 CEILING DETAILS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 CEILING DTL - HEADER 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5 CEILING DTL - WALL @ SOFFIT & LAY-IN CLNG 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6 CEILING DTL - SOFFIT 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1 CEILING DTL - WALL @ LAY-IN CLNG 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 CEILING DTL - WALL @ GYP CLNG 1 1/2" = 1'-0"7 CEILING DTL - MILLWORK FURRDOWN 1 1/2" = 1'-0"8 CEILING DTL - GYP CLG AND MILLWORK FURRDOWN 1 1/2" = 1'-0"9 CEILING DTL - ACT TO GYP 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 CEILING DTL - ROLLER SHADES 1. RE: SHEET G001 FOR ADDITIONAL GENERAL NOTES THAT ARE APPLICABLE. 2. RE: SHEET G003/4 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES. 3. RE: FINISH LEGEND AND FINISH SCHEDULE FOR SPECIFIC FINISH INFORMATION AND LOCATIONS. 4. WALL FINISHES SHOWN ARE FOR ACCENT CLARIFICATION ONLY. RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN AND FINISH LEGEND FOR ADDITIONAL ROOM FINISHES. 5. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD CONTROL JOINTS AT DOOR HEADERS WHERE GYPSUM BOARD EXCEEDS 30 FEET (TYP.), UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. JOINTS TO BE LINED UP WITH BOTH SIDES OF DOOR FRAMES FOR DOORS 4'-0" AND OVER AND ALL DOORS THAT ARE LEAD LINED. 6. ALIGN ALL WALL TILE JOINTS WITH FLOOR TILE JOINTS, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 7. TRANSITION ALL WALL AND BASE FINISHES, AND/ OR COLOR CHANGES AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONSULT ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION, IF NECESSARY. 8. CONTINUE WALL FINISH AS SCHEDULED BEHIND ALL FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING UNDER OPEN COUNTERS. 9. CONTINUE WALL BASE AT ALL WALLS, FURRED OUT COLUMNS & COLUMN COVERS, AND AT ALL CASEWORK TOE KICKS, SIDE PANELS, AND UNDER OPEN COUNTERS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO MILLWORK/ CASEWORK FABRICATION & INSTALLATION. 11. ALL MILLWORK/CASEWORK CONSTRUCTION SHALL MEET AWI PREMIUM STANDARDS, UNLESS NOTED OR SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. 12. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE & INSTALL GROMMETS AT 48” O.C. MAX. AT ALL WORK STATIONS WITH OPEN KNEE SPACE. COORDINATE LOCATIONS DIRECTLY WITH ELECTRICAL/DATA DRAWINGS FOR OUTLET LOCATIONS. COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. 13. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONCEALED COUNTERTOP BRACKETS AT OPEN KNEE SPACES WIDER THAN 42” (TYP.). CENTER IN OPEN AREA AND PAINT TO MATCH WALL COLOR, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 14. ALL EXPOSED CASEWORK/MILLWORK SURFACES SHALL BE FINISHED TO MATCH ADJACENT PLASTIC LAMINATE SURFACES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 15. ALL FILLER PANELS SHALL BE FINISHES TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES AND SCRIBED TO FIT ADJACENT WALL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 16. RE: EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS & SPECS. FOR EQUIPMENT ITEMS SHOWN DASHED, PROVIDED BY EQUIP. CONSULTANT AND/ OR SUPPLIED BY OWNER. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES AS NECESSARY. 17. MECH. & ELEC. SYMBOLS AND OUTLETS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH MEP DRAWINGS. CONSULT ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION, IF NECESSARY. GENERAL NOTES INTERIOR ELEVS MILLWORK: TYPE DEPTHWIDTH KL KEY LOCK, RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS TL TOT LOCK, RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS LL LOCKER LOCK, RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS OPEN TO BEYOND 3' - 0 " 4' - 11"5' - 0"4' - 11" 2' - 6 " PL134 PL134 PL82 PL2 PL2 RBC39 PL2 PL2 A822 10 3' - 8"5' - 2"3' - 8" 1' - 1 0 1 / 2 " A822 10 SIM RBC39 PL82 6 A821 SIM6 A821 SIM 7 A821 SIM7 A821 SIM PT21 RBC39 EQ EQ PT82 3 3 / 4 " 4 1 / 2 " 1' - 5 3 / 4 " 2 21 2' - 6 " 3"PER OWNER 3" RP6 BEYOND OPEN TO BEYOND 4' - 11" CLEAR 5' - 0"4' - 11" 6" 2' - 6 " 3' - 0 " EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ REMOVABLE PANEL, TYP. PRT2PRT2 PL134 PT21 PL2 RBC39 PL134 PL134 PL2 PT21 6 A821 SIM6 A821 SIM 7 A821 SIM PT21 PL2 PL2 3 1 / 2 " 3 1 / 2 " 2' - 0"2' - 0" 11 A821 11 A821 OPEN TO BEYOND 2' - 6 " 1" 1' - 1 0 1 / 2 " 1" 1"4' - 4"1" PL134 PT28 PL2 PL82 RBC39 7 A821 SIM PT28 OPEN TO BEYONDOPEN TO BEYOND REMOVABLE PANEL, TYP. EQEQEQ 2' - 6 " PRT3 PL134 PT21 RBC39 PT21 PT21 7 A821 SIM PT21 RP6 3 3' - 0 " OPEN TO BEYOND 1' - 1 0 1 / 2 " A822 10 SIM 6 A821 SIM 5' - 9 3/4" PL134 PL2 PL82 PL2 RBC39 7 A821 SIM 2' - 6 " 2' - 4 " 2' - 4 " 16"D E1 35"W 16"D E1 35"W 16"D E1 35"W PRT2 PT21 PL134 PT21 RBC39 9 A821 SIM. PL82 TYP. 2' - 4 " 2' - 4 " 2' - 6 " 16"D E1 32"W 16"D E1 32"W 16"D E1 32"W PT21 PL134 RBC39 PT21 9 A821 SIM. PL82 TYP.16"D E1 32"W 2' - 4 " 2' - 4 " 2' - 6 " 16"D E1 33"W 16"D E1 33"W KL KL KL KL 9 A821 SIM. PT21 RBC39 PT21 PT21 PL82 TYP. PL134 2' - 6 " 6" 2' - 6 " 3' - 0 " OPEN TO BEYOND REMOVABLE PANEL, TYP. PT21 PL134PL134PL2 RBC39 6 A821 SIM 7 A821 SIM PT21 24"D A1 27"W 24"D A1 27"W 2' - 1 0 " CLEARANCE W/ OWNER COORD. REQ. FURNITURE TL TL TL TL TL TL TL TL PT21 RBC39 PL82 TYP. PL134 24"D A1 21"W24"D A4 21"W ADA PANEL C2 33"W 24"D 2' - 0 " 2' - 1 0 " PT21 PL134 PL134 PL82 RBC39 PL82 TYP. PT2 SD1 ADA PANEL C2 33"W 24"D 24"D A1 30"W24"D A4 15"W 2' - 0 " 2' - 1 0 " TL TL TL TL TL PT28 PL134PL134 PL82 RBC39 PL82 TYP. PT28 PT2 SD1 24"D A4 15"W24"D A1 30"W 2' - 1 0 " 2' - 0 " 2' - 6 " TLTL TLTL TL GD1 SH1 DH1 SC2 PT21 PL134 PL134 PL82 RBC39 TYP. R 0' - 6 " 1' - 6" PL134 IRL6 9 A821 SIM. 2' - 6 " 9 A821 SIM. PT21 PL134 RBC39 ADA PANEL C2 33"W 24"D24"D A1 15"W 24"D A1 18"W 24"D A1 33"W 24"D A1 33"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W REF1 CM1 MCW1 2' - 4 " 2' - 0 " 2' - 1 0 " UCF1 TEL1 PT21 RBC39 PT21 PL134 PL134PL82 PL82 TYP. TYP. CLEAR 2' - 0" PT2 HS1 PL82 END PANEL 4" 3' - 5 " 3' - 5 " TYP. 1' - 0"PT21 RBC39 PT21 8 A821 7" 7" 3" 3" LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL 4 TYP. 2' - 1 0 " 24"D A1 27"W 24"D A1 27"W 24"D A1 27"W SC1 CLEARANCE W/ OWNER COORD. REQ. FURNITURE PT21 PL134PL82 TYP. RBC39 TL TL TL TL TL TL TL TL TL TL TL TL OFOI BANNER SIGNAGE. VERIFY SIZE WITH OWNER. 1 ALIGN HEIGHT OF STENCIL DETAIL WITH STENCIL DETAIL ON ADJACENT WALLS. RE: FINISH DETAILS. 2 NOTES BY NUMBER INTERIOR ELEVATIONS CASEWORK PRINTER CART.3 LOCKER NUMBER.4 SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A711 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 1/2" = 1'-0"1 INTERIOR ELEVATION - CHECK IN - FRONT 1/2" = 1'-0"2 INTERIOR ELEVATION - CHECK IN - BACK 1/2" = 1'-0"3 INTERIOR ELEVATION - CHECK OUT1/2" = 1'-0"4 INTERIOR ELEVATION - CHECK OUT 1/2" = 1'-0"6 INTERIOR ELEVATION - RECEPTION 1/2" = 1'-0"14 INTERIOR ELEVATION - WORK ROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"13 INTERIOR ELEVATION - WORK ROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"5 INTERIOR ELEVATION - WORK STATION 1/2" = 1'-0"7 INTERIOR ELEVATION - CHECK OUT 1/2" = 1'-0"8 INTERIOR ELEVATION - VITALS 1/2" = 1'-0"10 INTERIOR ELEVATION - NURSING 1/2" = 1'-0"9 INTERIOR ELEVATION - CORRIDOR 1/2" = 1'-0"11 INTERIOR ELEVATION - TYP. EXAM ROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"12 INTERIOR ELEVATION - WORK ROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"15 INTERIOR ELEVATION - BREAK ROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"16 INTERIOR ELEVATION - BREAK ROOM 1/2" = 1'-0"17 INTERIOR ELEVATION - VITALS OPEN TO BEYOND 3' - 0 " 2' - 10 1/2"2' - 10 1/2"2' - 10 1/2"2' - 10 1/2"2' - 10 1/2"2' - 10 1/2"2' - 10 1/2"2' - 10 1/2" A822 10 SIM TYP. 1' - 1 0 1 / 2 " 3' - 0 " 1' - 1 0 1 / 2 " CLEAR 5' - 0" 6 A821 SIM6 A821 SIM PT28 PL134PL134 RBC39RBC39 OPEN TO BEYOND 3' - 0 " 2' - 9 1/8"2' - 9 1/8" 1' - 1 0 1 / 2 " PT28 PL134 RBC39 A822 10 SIM6 A821 SIM OPEN TO BEYOND 3' - 0 " 2' - 9 1/8"2' - 9 1/4" 1' - 1 0 1 / 2 " A822 10 SIM TYP. PT28 PL134 RBC39 6 A821 SIM 3' - 0 " 1' - 1 0 " 2' - 4 " 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 2' - 4 " 1' - 1 0 " 3' - 0 " 24"D A1 30"W 2' - 6 " PRT2 PRT2 24"D A1 30"W24"D A1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W16"D E1 30"W16"D E1 30"W16"D E1 30"W16"D E1 30"W16"D E1 30"W16"D E1 30"W16"D E1 30"W16"D E1 30"W PRT3 PL134 PL82 TYP. PL82 TYP. PL82 TYP. PL82 TYP. PL82 TYP. PL82 TYP. PL134PL134PL134 PL134PL82 TYP. RBC39 RBC39 RBC39RBC39RBC39 PT28 PT28 PT28 PT28 PT28 PT28 PT28PT28 9 A821 SIM.9 A821 SIM.9 A821 SIM. RBC39 PT28 PT28 PT28 PT28 PT28 PT28 2' - 6 " 2' - 6 " OPEN TO BEYOND EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ 3' - 0 " REMOVABLE PANEL, TYP. PT28 PL134 RBC39RBC39 REMOVABLE PANEL, TYP. 6 A821 SIM 6 A821 SIM PL2PL2PL134 PT28 PT28 PT28 RBC39 PT28 RBC39 2' - 6 " 6" MFZ1 MRF1 3' - 0 " 1' - 1 0 " 2' - 4 " 1' - 1 0 " 3' - 0 " C2 33"W 24"D24"D A4 15"W24"D A1 33"W24"D A1 30"W24"D A1 30"W24"D A1 30"W24"D A1 30"W VERIFY WITH EQ. CLEARANCE 5' - 1"24"D A1 15"W24"D A4 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W KL KL KL KL VC1 VC1 PRT3 LB1 LB1 LB1 LB1 PL134PL82 TYP. RBC39 PL134 PT28 PL134 PT28 PL134 PL82 TYP. PL82 RBC39 PL82 TYP. PT2 ALZ1 R 0' - 6 "R 0' - 6 "SD1 OPEN TO BEYOND EQEQ REMOVABLE PANEL, TYP. 3' - 0 " PT28 PL134 RBC39 PT28 PL2 PT28 6 A821 SIM 2' - 6 " 6" 3' - 0 " 2' - 0 " ADA PANEL C2 33"W 24"D24"D A1 36"W 24"D A4 15"W TL TL TL TL TL PL134 PT28 PL134 PL82 PT28 PL82 RBC39 PT2 SD1 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A1 30"W 24"D A4 27"W 24"D A1 33"W 24"D A1 33"W C2 33"W 24"D 3' - 0 " LRF13' - 0 " 1' - 1 0 " 2' - 4 " 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W 16"D E1 30"W TBD BY OWNER PL134 TYP. RBC39 PL134 PL82 TYP. 8" PL82 CLEAR 2' - 3" PT28 PT28 PL82 TYP. PL82 PT2 SD1 PC1PC1 PL82 VALENCE 2" 12" DEPTH9 A821 SIM. PL134 ADA PANEL 27"D A9 51"W 2' - 0 " 3' - 0 " 7' - 2 " C2 33"W 24"D24"D A4 15"W TL KLKL PL134 PT28 PT28 PT28 RBC39 RBC39 PL134 PL82 PL82 PL82 KLKL PT2 SD1 PT28 1. RE: SHEET G001 FOR ADDITIONAL GENERAL NOTES THAT ARE APPLICABLE. 2. RE: SHEET G003/4 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES. 3. RE: FINISH LEGEND AND FINISH SCHEDULE FOR SPECIFIC FINISH INFORMATION AND LOCATIONS. 4. WALL FINISHES SHOWN ARE FOR ACCENT CLARIFICATION ONLY. RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN AND FINISH LEGEND FOR ADDITIONAL ROOM FINISHES. 5. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD CONTROL JOINTS AT DOOR HEADERS WHERE GYPSUM BOARD EXCEEDS 30 FEET (TYP.), UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. JOINTS TO BE LINED UP WITH BOTH SIDES OF DOOR FRAMES FOR DOORS 4'-0" AND OVER AND ALL DOORS THAT ARE LEAD LINED. 6. ALIGN ALL WALL TILE JOINTS WITH FLOOR TILE JOINTS, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 7. TRANSITION ALL WALL AND BASE FINISHES, AND/ OR COLOR CHANGES AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONSULT ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION, IF NECESSARY. 8. CONTINUE WALL FINISH AS SCHEDULED BEHIND ALL FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING UNDER OPEN COUNTERS. 9. CONTINUE WALL BASE AT ALL WALLS, FURRED OUT COLUMNS & COLUMN COVERS, AND AT ALL CASEWORK TOE KICKS, SIDE PANELS, AND UNDER OPEN COUNTERS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO MILLWORK/ CASEWORK FABRICATION & INSTALLATION. 11. ALL MILLWORK/CASEWORK CONSTRUCTION SHALL MEET AWI PREMIUM STANDARDS, UNLESS NOTED OR SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. 12. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE & INSTALL GROMMETS AT 48” O.C. MAX. AT ALL WORK STATIONS WITH OPEN KNEE SPACE. COORDINATE LOCATIONS DIRECTLY WITH ELECTRICAL/DATA DRAWINGS FOR OUTLET LOCATIONS. COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. 13. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONCEALED COUNTERTOP BRACKETS AT OPEN KNEE SPACES WIDER THAN 42” (TYP.). CENTER IN OPEN AREA AND PAINT TO MATCH WALL COLOR, UNLESS NOTED OR SHOWN OTHERWISE. 14. ALL EXPOSED CASEWORK/MILLWORK SURFACES SHALL BE FINISHED TO MATCH ADJACENT PLASTIC LAMINATE SURFACES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 15. ALL FILLER PANELS SHALL BE FINISHES TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES AND SCRIBED TO FIT ADJACENT WALL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 16. RE: EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS & SPECS. FOR EQUIPMENT ITEMS SHOWN DASHED, PROVIDED BY EQUIP. CONSULTANT AND/ OR SUPPLIED BY OWNER. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES AS NECESSARY. 17. MECH. & ELEC. SYMBOLS AND OUTLETS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH MEP DRAWINGS. CONSULT ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION, IF NECESSARY. GENERAL NOTES INTERIOR ELEVS OPEN TO BEYOND PL134 RBC39 PROVIDE PL82 FINISHED SIDE PANELS WITH SIM. 4" TOE KICK. PL82 3' - 0 " 10 A821 SIM MILLWORK: TYPE DEPTHWIDTH KL KEY LOCK, RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS TL TOT LOCK, RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS LL LOCKER LOCK, RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS OFOI BANNER SIGNAGE. VERIFY SIZE WITH OWNER. 1 ALIGN HEIGHT OF STENCIL DETAIL WITH STENCIL DETAIL ON ADJACENT WALLS. RE: FINISH DETAILS. 2 NOTES BY NUMBER INTERIOR ELEVATIONS CASEWORK PRINTER CART.3 LOCKER NUMBER.4 SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A712 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 1/2" = 1'-0"1 INTERIOR ELEVATION - MA STATION 1/2" = 1'-0"5 INTERIOR ELEVATION - MA STATION 1/2" = 1'-0"2 INTERIOR ELEVATION - MA STATION 1/2" = 1'-0"6 INTERIOR ELEVATION - MA STATION 1/2" = 1'-0"4 INTERIOR ELEVATION - MA STATION 1/2" = 1'-0"8 INTERIOR ELEVATION - MED LAB 1/2" = 1'-0"3 INTERIOR ELEVATION - MA STATION 1/2" = 1'-0"11 INTERIOR ELEVATION - CORRIDOR HANDWASH 1/2" = 1'-0"10 INTERIOR ELEVATION - MED LAB 1/2" = 1'-0"9 INTERIOR ELEVATION - CORRIDOR HANDWASH 1/2" = 1'-0"7 INTERIOR ELEVATION - MA STATION 1"1" 2' - 4" 4" 3/4" 10" RE : I N T . E L E V A T I O N S ACCESS PANEL -P-LAM ON 3/4" MDF A&M CONCEALED FLAT BRACKET OR CUSTOM EQUIVALENT FIELD-DRILL GROMMETS AS REQ. BASE AS SCHED WIRINGRE : I N T . E L E V A T I O N S 1 3/4" 1 1 / 2 " 7' -2" U . N . O . BACK PANEL ADJUSTABLE SHELF, TYP. MOUNTING RAIL 5/ 8 " 1/2" PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD SCRIBE INT. ELEVATIONS 14" TO FACE OF CABINET UNO ON RE : E L E V A T I O N S . PULL-1, RE: MILLWORK HARDWARE SCHEDULE 2 1 / 4 " U.C. LIGHT, RE: ELECTRICAL BOX DRAWER LAMINATE COUNTERTOP, PER INT. ELEVATIONS BACKSPLASH, PER INT. ELEVATIONS BACK PANEL PULL-1, RE: MILLWORK HARDWARE SCHEDULE ADJUSTABLE SHELF CLAD DOOR/DRAWERS, FINISH PER INT. ELEVATIONS MOUNTING RAIL WOOD BLOCKING ON INT. ELEVATIONS 25" U.N.O. 6" 1 1 / 2 " 3/4" RE : E L E V A T I O N S A821 13 A821 12 BASE AS SCHED. 4" 3/4"1" 1" 2' - 8" RE : I N T . E L E V A T I O N S 1 1 / 2 " TRANSACTION TOP BEYOND FIELD-DRILL GROMMETS AS REQ. A&M CONCEALED FLAT BRACKET OR CUSTOM EQUIVALENT 1 1 / 2 " RE : E L E V A T I O N S A821 13 A821 12 6'' DIA. SS TRASH GROMMET, BOD: MOCKETT TM1B TRASH RECEPTACLE, OFOI ON INT. ELEVATIONS 25" U.N.O. LAMINATE COUNTERTOP, PER INT. ELEVATIONS BACKSPLASH, PER INT. ELEVATIONS BACK PANEL CLAD DOOR/DRAWERS, FINISH PER INT. ELEVATIONS MOUNTING RAIL WOOD BLOCKING 9" 7" 1' - 6 " 2' - 1 0 " T O S I N K R I M 3/4" LIP 9" 6 1 MIN SLOPE 6" M A X BULL NOSE AT END OF PANEL OF DRAIN 11" PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD, REMOVABLE PANEL WITHOUT EXPOSED FASTENERS PLACE DRAIN TOWARD BACK OF SINK INTERMEDIATE STL ANGLE SUPPORT AT 36" MAX OC AND 30" MIN OC 6" MAX TO BOTTOM OF SINK BOWL CONTINUOUS WOOD LEDGER (BACK AND ENDS) PLAM COUNTERTOP SPLASHES AT ABUTTING SIDEWALLS, RE: INT. ELEVATIONS INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 2' - 1" UNO ON MAX 6" BOWL WIDTH 1' - 1 1/2" MAX 4'-0" CLEAR FLOOR SPACE PE R I N T . E L E V A T I O N S FACE OF CABINET ADJUSTABLE SHELF, TYP. U.N.O. FIXED SHELF MOUNTING RAIL WOOD BLOCKING 1/2" PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD SCRIBE BASE AS SCHED. PE R I N T . E L E V A T I O N 1" 4" PULL-1, RE: MILLWORK HARDWARE SCHEDULE PULL-1, RE: MILLWORK HARDWARE SCHEDULE PER INT. ELEVATION A&M CONCEALED FLAT BRACKET OR CUSTOM EQUIVALENT RE : I N T E R I O R E L E V A T I O N S 1 1 / 2 " U.N.O. 2' - 1" CABINET DOOR BASE AS SCHED. FACE OF CABINET 3/4" WIDE MIN. WATERPROOF MDF 3 1/4" 4 1 / 8 " 1/ 8 " FACE OF CABINET PLASTIC LAMINATE EDGE ON 2 LAYERS OF 3/4" SUBSTRATE 1 1 / 2 " 1" 3/ 4 " 3/4"PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH AT KNEE SPACE CONDITIONS DRAWER/ DOOR PULL NOTE: REFER TO FINISH LEGEND FOR COUNTERTOP MATERIAL VARIES RE : I N T E R I O R E L E V A T I O N 1" 4" 1' - 3"3" MOUNTING RAIL WOOD BLOCKING BASE AS SCHED. 1/2" PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD SCRIBE DOUBLE COAT HOOK ON BOTH INTERIOR FACING SIDES OF LOCKER, TYP. LOCKER LOCK, RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS LOCKER LOCK, RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS DOUBLE COAT HOOK ON BOTH SIDES, TYP. TY P . 7" 3' - 8 " M A X . ADJUSTABLE SHELF ADJUSTABLE SHELF GENERAL NOTES CASEWORK SECTIONS ALL SECTION DETAILS ON THIS SHEET MAY NOT APPLY TO THIS PROJECT: ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK TARGETING: TARGETS, WIDTH AND HEIGHT ARE INDICATED ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS IN THE A45 SERIES DRAWINGS. VERIFY AND COORDINATE CLEAR DIMENSIONS REQUIRED FOR OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT LOCATED WITHIN OR ADJACENT TO ANY CABINETS. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF SINKS WITH ASSOCIATED PIPING AND FITTINGS PLUS WITH INSTALLATION OF ACCESSIBLE COVER PANELS. REQUIRED SCRIBES AND FILLER PIECES SHALL BE INSTALLED TO ALLOW PROPER OPERATION OF DRAWERS AND DOORS. THEY SHALL BE EVENLY DISTRIBUTED AND OF EQUAL WIDTH ALONG A SINGLE RUN OF CABINETS. THEY SHALL BE 3" WIDE, MAXIMUM EXCEPT INSIDE CORNER FILLERS SHALL BE 2 1/2" WIDE, MINIMUM. RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS. WHERE BASE CABINETS INTERSECT AT INSIDE CORNER CONDITIONS PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED LEDGERS TO SUPPORT COUNTERTOP AT CORNERS. WHERE UPPER CABINETS INTERSECT AT INSIDE CORNER CONDITIONS PROVIDE HORIZONTAL FILLER PANEL FLUSH WITH BOTTOM OF CABINETS. PROVIDE PLASTIC SCREW COVERS TO CONCEAL SCREW HEADS AT ALL SEMI-EXPOSED CABINET SURFACES. ALL EXPOSED SCREWS SHALL BE COUNTERSUNK. CORE MATERIAL FOR SHELVING GREATER THAN 30" WIDE SHALL BE 1" THICK. ALL VERTICAL JOINTS BETWEEN CABINETS SHALL BE BUTT JOINTS. THEY SHALL LOOK "SEAMLESS" AND COVERED IN PLASTIC LAMINATE. FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS BEFORE CABINET FABRICATION. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF CONFLICTS AND DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO FABRICATION. PROVIDE FILLER PANELS AS NEEDED BETWEEN BUILT- IN APPLIANCES AND ADJACENT CABINETS OR WALLS. ALL COUNTERTOPS 25" DEEP UNO ON INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED BRACKETS FOR SUPPORT OF COUNTERTOPS AT KNEE SPACES. COUNTERTOPS SHALL BE SUPPORTED 30" MINIMUM - 36" MAXIMUM OC. LOCATE GROMMETS AT BACK OF COUNTERTOPS (OVER KNEE SPACE, ONLY) EVERY 36" OC WITH A MINIMUM OF 1 PER KNEE SPACE UNO ON THE EQUIPMENT PLAN. COORDINATE FINAL GROMMET LOCATIONS WITH OWNER, EXCEPT DO NOT PROVIDE GROMMETS AT ACCESSIBLE PORTION OF COUNTER, AS INDICATED ON THE EQUIPMENT PLANS. PROVIDE ALL BACK AND SIDE SPLASHES THAT ARE 4" TALL X 3/4" THICK IF PLASTIC LAMINATE, 1/2" THICK IF SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL, UNO ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. ALL SPLASHES SHALL BE SCRIBED TO CONFORM TO THE SURFACE OF ABUTTING WALLS. ALL SPLASHES SHALL BE SEALED TO THE WALL WITH CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT. PROVIDE SPLASHES ON ALL REAR AND SIDE WALLS AT BASE CABINETS. PROVIDE SCHEDULED BASE ALONG BOTTOM OF EXPOSED FRONTS, BACKS, SIDES, AND ENDS OF ALL FIXED CABINETS, PEDESTALS, VERTICAL SUPPORT PANELS, KNEE SPACES,ETC, UNO ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. ALL DRAWER LENGTHS SHALL BE 20", UNO. ALL DRAWERS GREATER THAN 30" WIDE SHALL HAVE 2 PULLS. ALL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL JOINTS SHALL BE 1/8" MAX. ALL TOE KICK SPACES SHALL BE 4 1/8" TALL X 3 1/4" DEEP. TOP OF UPPER AND FULL HEIGHT CABINETS SHALL BE 7'-2" AFF UNO ON INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. RE: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR FURR DOWN LOCATIONS. WALL MOUNTED UPPER CABINETS SHALL INCLUDE ADJUSTABLE SHELF (SHELVES), UNO CABINET HEIGHT NUMBER OF SHELVES THROUGH 24" 1 25" THROUGH 42" 2 43" THROUGH 48" 3 TOPS AND BOTTOMS OF WALL HUNG CABINETS SHALL BE 3/4" THICK WITH PLASTIC LAMINATE ON EXPOSED SURFACES. BACKS OF WALL HUNG CABINETS SHALL BE 1/4" THICK UNO. BACKS OF BASE CABINETS SHALL BE 1/4" THICK UNO. . 24" A1 CABINET WIDTH CABINET TYPE GENERAL: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. COUNTERTOP: 1. 2. 3. 4. BASE CABINETS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. UPPER CABINETS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ZORO G5570201 2" SWIVEL CASTOR, TYP. 1' - 6" 3/ 4 " 2 3 / 4 " 4" A&M CONCEALED FLAT BRACKET OR CUSTOM EQUIVALENT BASE AS SCHED 1 1 / 2 " 1' - 4" 1"1" SIDE PANEL BEYOND RE : I N T E R I O R E L E V A T I O N S SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A821 TYPICAL CASEWORK SECTIONS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 1" = 1'-0"6 CASEWORK SECTION - TRANSACTION TOP 1" = 1'-0"5 TYPE E1 - UPPER CABINET 1" = 1'-0"1 TYPE A1 - BASE CABINET 1" = 1'-0"7 CASEWORK SECTION - ACCESSIBLE 1" = 1'-0"2 TYPE A4 - BASE CABINET 1" = 1'-0"4 TYPE C2 - ACCESSIBLE SINK 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 CASEWORK SECTION - TYPE A9 1" = 1'-0"9 CASEWORK SECTION - WRITING SURFACE 3" = 1'-0"12 SECTION DETAIL - TOE KICK 3" = 1'-0"13 SECTION DETAIL - PLASTIC LAMINATE 1 1/2" = 1'-0"8 CASEWORK SECTION - LOCKERS 3" = 1'-0"11 CASEWORK SECTION - MOBILE PEDESTAL 1" = 1'-0"10 CASEWORK SECTION - TEAMWORK ISLAND PASS THRU 48 " M A X . A F F FR BLOCKING AS REQUIRED PE R . M A N U F A C T U R E R 2" 2"2" 1 3 / 8 " 1 3 / 8 " 1 3 / 8 " 2" 1 3 / 8 " 2" 3 5 / 8 " 2" 1 3 / 8 " MAGNETIC LOCK AT DRAWERS MAGNETIC LOCK AT CABINET DOORS 1" 1 " 1" 1 " OUTLINE OF CASEWORK BELOW OUTLINE OF CASEWORK BELOW LEAVE CORNER SQUARE NEXT TO EQUIPMENT R2 CORNER AT EXPOSED FINISHED ENDS WALL TITE-JOINT FASTENER BELOW BISCUIT COUNTERTOP SEAM FINISHED EDGE 1 / 8 " 7 / 8 " 1/16" 1/8" 7 / 8 " 3/4" 3/4" CA B S I D E CA B S I D E DOORDOOR TYPICAL CABINET SEAM DOOR CA B S I D E DO O R CAB TOP 7/8" 1/8" RE : E L E V 1 1 / 2 " T Y P . 1 / 8 " 3/ 4 " 1" GYP. SOFFIT DOOR CA B S I D E 7/ 8 " 1 / 8 " RE: ELEV 1 1/2" TYP. 1/8" 3/4" SU B T R I M FACE OF ADJACENT WALL DO O R CAB SIDE 3 / 4 " 1/ 8 " 1/8" 2 1 / 8 " DOOR DO O R SCRIBE CA B S I D E SU B T R I M SC R I B E SUB TRIM CAB SIDE 3 / 4 " 3/ 4 " 7/8" 1/8" MI N . 2 1 / 2 " 1/ 8 " 1/8"MIN. 3 1/4" 7/ 8 " 1/ 8 " 3/4" 3/4" BOTTOM BEYOND ON UPPER CABINETS ONLY OPEN TO FLOOR ON TALL CABINETS AND BASE CABINETS 1"5"1"RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1"5"1" 1 1 / 2 " 1" 5" 1" RE : I N T E R I O R E L E V A T I O N S 1" 4" PL134 PL82 PL82 PL82PL82 PL120 PL120 1"1" RBC39 PL2 1 1/2"1 1/2" GENERAL NOTES CASEWORK SECTIONS ALL SECTION DETAILS ON THIS SHEET MAY NOT APPLY TO THIS PROJECT: ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK TARGETING: TARGETS, WIDTH AND HEIGHT ARE INDICATED ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS IN THE A45 SERIES DRAWINGS. VERIFY AND COORDINATE CLEAR DIMENSIONS REQUIRED FOR OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT LOCATED WITHIN OR ADJACENT TO ANY CABINETS. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF SINKS WITH ASSOCIATED PIPING AND FITTINGS PLUS WITH INSTALLATION OF ACCESSIBLE COVER PANELS. REQUIRED SCRIBES AND FILLER PIECES SHALL BE INSTALLED TO ALLOW PROPER OPERATION OF DRAWERS AND DOORS. THEY SHALL BE EVENLY DISTRIBUTED AND OF EQUAL WIDTH ALONG A SINGLE RUN OF CABINETS. THEY SHALL BE 3" WIDE, MAXIMUM EXCEPT INSIDE CORNER FILLERS SHALL BE 2 1/2" WIDE, MINIMUM. RE: TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS. WHERE BASE CABINETS INTERSECT AT INSIDE CORNER CONDITIONS PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED LEDGERS TO SUPPORT COUNTERTOP AT CORNERS. WHERE UPPER CABINETS INTERSECT AT INSIDE CORNER CONDITIONS PROVIDE HORIZONTAL FILLER PANEL FLUSH WITH BOTTOM OF CABINETS. PROVIDE PLASTIC SCREW COVERS TO CONCEAL SCREW HEADS AT ALL SEMI-EXPOSED CABINET SURFACES. ALL EXPOSED SCREWS SHALL BE COUNTERSUNK. CORE MATERIAL FOR SHELVING GREATER THAN 30" WIDE SHALL BE 1" THICK. ALL VERTICAL JOINTS BETWEEN CABINETS SHALL BE BUTT JOINTS. THEY SHALL LOOK "SEAMLESS" AND COVERED IN PLASTIC LAMINATE. FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS BEFORE CABINET FABRICATION. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF CONFLICTS AND DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO FABRICATION. PROVIDE FILLER PANELS AS NEEDED BETWEEN BUILT- IN APPLIANCES AND ADJACENT CABINETS OR WALLS. ALL COUNTERTOPS 25" DEEP UNO ON INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED BRACKETS FOR SUPPORT OF COUNTERTOPS AT KNEE SPACES. COUNTERTOPS SHALL BE SUPPORTED 30" MINIMUM - 36" MAXIMUM OC. LOCATE GROMMETS AT BACK OF COUNTERTOPS (OVER KNEE SPACE, ONLY) EVERY 36" OC WITH A MINIMUM OF 1 PER KNEE SPACE UNO ON THE EQUIPMENT PLAN. COORDINATE FINAL GROMMET LOCATIONS WITH OWNER, EXCEPT DO NOT PROVIDE GROMMETS AT ACCESSIBLE PORTION OF COUNTER, AS INDICATED ON THE EQUIPMENT PLANS. PROVIDE ALL BACK AND SIDE SPLASHES THAT ARE 4" TALL X 3/4" THICK IF PLASTIC LAMINATE, 1/2" THICK IF SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL, UNO ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. ALL SPLASHES SHALL BE SCRIBED TO CONFORM TO THE SURFACE OF ABUTTING WALLS. ALL SPLASHES SHALL BE SEALED TO THE WALL WITH CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT. PROVIDE SPLASHES ON ALL REAR AND SIDE WALLS AT BASE CABINETS. PROVIDE SCHEDULED BASE ALONG BOTTOM OF EXPOSED FRONTS, BACKS, SIDES, AND ENDS OF ALL FIXED CABINETS, PEDESTALS, VERTICAL SUPPORT PANELS, KNEE SPACES,ETC, UNO ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. ALL DRAWER LENGTHS SHALL BE 20", UNO. ALL DRAWERS GREATER THAN 30" WIDE SHALL HAVE 2 PULLS. ALL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL JOINTS SHALL BE 1/8" MAX. ALL TOE KICK SPACES SHALL BE 4 1/8" TALL X 3 1/4" DEEP. TOP OF UPPER AND FULL HEIGHT CABINETS SHALL BE 7'-2" AFF UNO ON INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. RE: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR FURR DOWN LOCATIONS. WALL MOUNTED UPPER CABINETS SHALL INCLUDE ADJUSTABLE SHELF (SHELVES), UNO CABINET HEIGHT NUMBER OF SHELVES THROUGH 24" 1 25" THROUGH 42" 2 43" THROUGH 48" 3 TOPS AND BOTTOMS OF WALL HUNG CABINETS SHALL BE 3/4" THICK WITH PLASTIC LAMINATE ON EXPOSED SURFACES. BACKS OF WALL HUNG CABINETS SHALL BE 1/4" THICK UNO. BACKS OF BASE CABINETS SHALL BE 1/4" THICK UNO. . 24" A1 CABINET WIDTH CABINET TYPE GENERAL: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. COUNTERTOP: 1. 2. 3. 4. BASE CABINETS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. UPPER CABINETS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1" = 1'-0"1 SECTION DETAIL - PASS THRU @ RR SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A822 TYPICAL CASEWORK DETAILS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 MAGNETIC LOCK LOCATIONS 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 PLAN DETAIL - COUNTER TOP @ EXPOSED FINISH END 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 LAMINATE COUNTERTOP SEAM 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5 PLAN DETAIL - DOOR REVEAL 1 1/2" = 1'-0"8 SECTION DETAIL - TOP TRIM 1 1/2" = 1'-0"7 PLAN DETAIL - SIDE TRIM 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6 SECTION DETAIL - LIGHT VALANCE 1 1/2" = 1'-0"9 PLAN DETAIL - INSIDE CORNER GENERAL NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS TO BE VERIFIED BY ANTON PRIOR TO FABRICATION. COORDINATE ALL MILLWORK WITH EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE IN-WALL BLOCKING AS REQ. CASTERS ZORO G55700201 PLATE CASTER, 2" DIA BLACK/ZINC ANTON USE FOR PRINTER CART Z-CLIP MF625-1-1/2 1-1/2" Z-CLIP 5/8" LIFT OFF MILL FINISH ANTON CLOSET ROD KV 751 Ø1-1/16 CLOSET ROD CHROME ANTON CLOSET FLANGE KV 734 Ø1-1/16 CLOSET ROD FLANGE CHROME ANTON LOCKER NAME TAG NAPTAGS PG547 ALUMA-TOUGH LOCKER TAG 1-1/2" DIA BRUSHED ANTON COUNTER SUPPORT A&M HARDWARE HYB (1.5) XX 1.5" HYBRID BRACKET WHITE ANTON FOR USE ON OPEN KNEE SPACES ON GYP WALLS BY OTHERS COUNTER SUPPORT A&M HARDWARE C FLAT XX (2.0)2.0" CONCEALED FLAT BRACKET WHITE ANTON FOR USE IN TEAM WORK AND RECEPTION DESK W ALLS BUILT BY ANTON PULL-1 4" WIRE PULL DULL CHROME ANTON TRASH GROMMETS DOUG MOCKETT TM2B Ø6" X 2" STAINLESS STEEL GROMMET STAINLESS STEEL ANTON GROMMETS Ø2" GROMMET WHITE ANTON WIRE GROMMENTS TO BE CUT IN FIELD. VERIFY WITH OWNER FOR FINAL LOCATIONS SHELF BRACKETS KV 187-12 12" SHELF BRACKETS ANOCHROME ANTON SHELF STANDARD KV 87-84 84" EXTRA HEAVY-DUTY STANDARDS ANOCHROME ANTON ANGLE STRIKE OLYMPUS 12-2-26D LOCK CATCH ZINC ANTON USED FOR NATIONAL CAM LOCK OR OLYMPUS PAD LOCKABLE LOCKER LOCK LOCKER LOCK OLYPMUS DCP-US26D PADLOCKABLE CAM LOCK SATIN CHROME ANTON TOT LOCK SAFETY 1ST HS133 MAGNETIC LOCK WHITE ANTON KEY LOCK NATIONAL C8053-14A CAM LOCK NICKEL ANTON SHELF SUPPORTS KV 256 5MM SPOON SHELF REST CHROME ANTON ELBOW CATCH IVES SP2-A92 ANTON USED AT PAIR OF DOORS WITH NATIONAL LOCK DWR SLIDE ACCURIDE 3832C FULL EXTENSION 100LB DRAWER SLIDE ZINC ANTON BASE PLATE SALICE DOMNI 2MM BASE PLATE ZINC ANTON HINGE-2 SALICE 94 DEGREE SELF CLOSE HINGE ZINC ANTON NOTE: USE ANGLE RESTRICTION CLIP, USE ADJACENT TO TRIM STRIPS HINGE-1 SALICE C2R9A99 120 DEGREE SELF CLOSE HINGE ZINC ANTON DESIGNATION MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER PART # DESCRIPTION FINISH PROVIDER *SPECIAL ORDER / LONG LEAD MILLWORK HARDWARE SCHEDULE 1 1/2" = 1'-0"10 FINISH DETAIL - FACE OF TRANSACTION TOP SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A901 FINISH LEGEND PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 MS2 ROLLER SHADE MANUF: HUNTER DOUGLAS TYPE: ARCHITECTURAL E SCREEN 7501 COLOR: WHITE PEARL, 1% OPENNESS WINDOWS, TYP. U.N.O.96" RAILROADED ONE WIDTH NO SEAM. MOUNT TO UNDERSIDE OF GYP BD SOFFIT AT WINDOW OPENING. DO NOT MOUNT TO WINDOW FRAME F2 GLASS FILM MANUF: 3M TYPE: FASARA GLASS FINISHES; OPAQUE MATTE WINDOW FILM COLOR: WHITE SH2MA0W VARIES INSTALL FILM ON INTERIOR FACE OF GLAZING WHERE PARTITION IS TO BE BUILT INFRONT OF WINDOW. F2 GLASS FILM MANUF: 3M TYPE: FASARA GLASS FINISHES; SEMI-TRANSPARENT FROST WINDOW FILM COLOR: DUSTED CRYSTAL; 7725SE-314 WINDOW TREATMENT GYP PAINTED GYP. BD. CEILING TYPE: ZERO VOC, HARMONY INTERIOR LATEX COLOR: PT10, U.N.O. TYPICAL PAINT TO BE ROLLER APPLIED, LIGHT STIPPLE TEXTURE, EGGSHELL FINISH ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE MANUF: ROCKFON STYLE: ARCTIC SQUARE TEGULAR NARROW ITEM: 620 TILE SIZE: 24" X 24" GRID: 15/16" SUSPENSION SYSTEM TYPICAL ALL EXPOSED CUT TILE EDGES SHALL BE PAINTED W/ SUPERCOAT TOUCH-UP PAINT CEILING RP6 RESIN PANEL MANUF: 3FORM TYPE: CHROMA COLOR: MIDNIGHT B52 THICKNESS: 1/2" WAITING SS01 ALTERNATE 03: SOLID SURFACAE MANUF: FORMICA TYPE: EVERFORM SOLID SURFACE COLOR: SEA GLASS 505 COUNTER TOPS, TYP. U.N.O. RE: SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES RE: SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES PL120 PLASTIC LAMINATE MANUF: PIONITE TYPE: MELCORE II, TEXTURED SUEDE(SD) FINISH COLOR: ROYAL BLUE SB009-SD RECEPTION, MA STATION PL82 PLASTIC LAMINATE MANUF: NEVAMAR TYPE: PLASTIC LAMINATE, ARP (T) FINISH COLOR: BEIGE RENAISSANCE WM8258T DOORS AND VERTICAL MILLWORK, TYP. U.N.O. PL134 PLASTIC LAMINATE MANUF: WILSONART TYPE: PLASTIC LAMINATE, 60 MATTE FINISH COLOR: CATALINA 13092 COUNTER TOPS, TYP. U.N.O. PL2 PLASTIC LAMINATE MANUF: PIONITE TYPE: TEXTURED SUEDE(SD) FINISH COLOR: ANGEL WHITE SW826-SD RECEPTION, MA STATION MILLWORK FRP1 FIBER REINFORCED PANEL MANUF: US FRP PRODUCT: 4X8 FRP INDURO, SPECTURM CLASS A COLOR: DESIGNER WHITE EVS IRL6 RIGID WALL PROTECTION SHEET MANUF: INPRO TYPE: 0.040" THICK RIGID WALL PROTECTION SHEET, VELVET TEXTURE COLOR: PORCELAIN BLUE 0379 SIZE: 4' X 8' SHEETS EXAM, WAITING, RESTROOMS INSTALL FULL SHEETS HORIZONTALLY. OVERLAP RUBBER BASE BY 1". TOP OF SHEET TO BE AT 4'-3" AFF. DO NOT INSTALL WHERE LAMINATE BACKSPLASH OCCURS. UTILIZE COLOR-MATCH J-MOLD TOP CAP AND SEAL SEAM WITH CAULK. UTILIZE T-TRIM PIECES AT VERTICAL SEAMS WHERE PANELS ALIGN AND AT INSIDE CORNER CONDITIONS. EG2 END GUARD MANUF: INPRO TYPE: 160D SURFACE MOUNT END GUARD, PARTIAL HEIGHT, 90 DEGREE ANGLE COLOR: PORCELAIN BLUE 0379 SIZE: 3" VINYL, 1/4" RADIUS COVER RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN EG1 END GUARD MANUF: INPRO TYPE: 160D SURFACE MOUNT END GUARD, FULL HEIGHT, 90 DEGREE ANGLE COLOR: PORCELAIN BLUE 0379 SIZE: 3" VINYL, 1/4" RADIUS COVER RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN INSTALL CORNER GUARD ABOVE WALL BASE, U.N.O. CG3 CORNER GUARD MANUF: INPRO TYPE: SURFACE MOUNT CORNER GUARD, PARTIAL HEIGHT, CUSTOM ANGLE COLOR: PORCELAIN BLUE 0379 SIZE: 3" VINYL, 1/4" RADIUS COVER RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN INSTALL CORNER GUARD ABOVE WALL BASE, U.N.O ALIGN TOP OF CORNER GUARD WITH ADJACENT RIGID SHEET (51" A.F.F.) CG2 CORNER GUARD MANUF: INPRO TYPE: 150 SURFACE MOUNT CORNER GUARD, PARTIAL HEIGHT, 90 DEGREE ANGLE COLOR: PORCELAIN BLUE 0379 SIZE: 3" VINYL, 1/4" RADIUS COVER RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN INSTALL CORNER GUARD ABOVE WALL BASE, U.N.O ALIGN TOP OF CORNER GUARD WITH ADJACENT RIGID SHEET (51" A.F.F.) CG1 CORNER GUARD MANUF: INPRO TYPE: 150 SURFACE MOUNT CORNER GUARD, FULL HEIGHT, 90 DEGREE ANGLE COLOR: PORCELAIN BLUE 0379 SIZE: 3" VINYL, 1/4" RADIUS COVER RE: FINISH FLOOR PLAN INSTALL CORNER GUARD ABOVE WALL BASE, U.N.O. WT5 WOOD TRIM PAINTED TO MATCH PT2 PAINTED WITH ROLLER APPLIED INTERIOR LATEX PAINT, SMOOTH TEXTURE, SEMI-GLOSS FINISH SIZE: 2" X 3/8" D WAITING INSTALL CONTINOUSLY AROUND WAITING ROOM WITH STENCIL DETAIL ABOVE, RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS TOP OF WOOD TRIM TO BE ALIGNED WITH THE TOP OF METAL DOOR FRAME RBC39 RUBBER WALL BASE MANUF: ROPPE STYLE: 4" PINNACLE COVED BASE COLOR: P110 BROWN SIZE: 120' CONTINOUS ROLL TYP. THROUGHOUT U.N.O.TRANSITIONS AT INSIDE CORNERS ONLY WALL PROTECTION PT135E PROMAR INDUSTRIAL DTM ACRYLIC PAINT MANUF: SHERWIN WILLIAMS - PPG PAINT COLOR MATCH COLOR: 1005-7 DARK GRANITE DOOR FRAMES, TYP. U.N.O.ROLLER APPLIED, SMOOTH TEXTURE, SEMI GLOSS FINISH PT37 PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC INTERIOR LATEX PAINT MANUF:SHERWIN WILLIAMS - BENJAMIN MOORE COLOR MATCH COLOR: BM425 LIME TWIST CHECK IN STENCIL (SQUARE DOT)ROLLER APPLIED, LIGHT STIPPLE TEXTURE, EGGSHELL FINISH RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, FINISH FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION OF APPLICATION PT29E PROMAR INDUSTRIAL DTM ACRYLIC PAINT MANUF: SHERWIN WILLIAMS - PPG PAINT COLOR MATCH COLOR: 1179-1 MISTY MORN RESTROOM WALL PAINT, TYP. U.N.O.ROLLER APPLIED, LIGHT STIPPLE TEXTURE, EGGSHELL FINISH RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, FINISH FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION OF APPLICATION PT28 PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC INTERIOR LATEX PAINT MANUF:SHERWIN WILLIAMS - BENJAMIN MOORE COLOR MATCH COLOR: BM2049-70 ICING ON THE CAKE + 50% WHITE CORRIDORS, CHECK IN STENCIL (BACKGROUND)ROLLER APPLIED, LIGHT STIPPLE TEXTURE, EGGSHELL FINISH RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, FINISH FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION OF APPLICATION PT21 PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC INTERIOR LATEX PAINT MANUF:SHERWIN WILLIAMS - BENJAMIN MOORE COLOR MATCH COLOR: BM2067-70 WHITE SATIN WAITING, EXAM ROLLER APPLIED, LIGHT STIPPLE TEXTURE, EGGSHELL FINISH RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, FINISH FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION OF APPLICATION PT157 PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC INTERIOR LATEX PAINT MANUF: SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: SW6787 FOUNTAIN CHECK IN STENCIL (DASH STRIPE)ROLLER APPLIED, LIGHT STIPPLE TEXTURE, EGGSHELL FINISH RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, FINISH FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION OF APPLICATION PT10E PROMAR INDUSTRIAL DTM ACRYLIC PAINT MANUF: SHERWIN WILLIAMS - PPG PAINT COLOR MATCH COLOR: 90-474 CEILING WHITE RESTROOM CEILING PAINT, TYP. U.N.O.ROLLER APPLIED, LIGHT STIPPLE TEXTURE, EGGSHELL FINISH RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, FINISH FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION OF APPLICATION PT09 PROMAR INDUSTRIAL DTM ACRYLIC PAINT MANUF: SHERWIN WILLIAMS - PPG PAINT COLOR MATCH COLOR: SW7664 STEELY GRAY EXTERIOR DOOR FRAMES ROLLER APPLIED, SMOOTH TEXTURE, SEMI GLOSS FINISH WALL VT127 LUXURY VINYL TILE MANUF: PATCHCRAFT STYLE: MATERIAL EDIT, CURVED 1730V COLOR: PORCELAIN SPRUCE 00110 SIZE: 9" X 36" INSTALLATION: RANDOM STAGGER; RUN PLANKS PERPENDICULAR TO FIELD FLOORING TYP. THROUGHOUT U.N.O. CT55 CARPET TILE MANUF: INTERFACE STYLE: CUSTOM STEP ASIDE, 141750250 COLOR: BLUE 251350-022 SIZE: 50CM X 50CM INSTALLATION: BRICK OFFICES, ADMIN SPACES SEAM SEAL EDGES OF CARPET PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. FLOORING FIN. CODE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER / DESCRIPTION GENERAL LOCATION NOTES INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE TV TV FLOOR FINISH: A. ALL FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS TO BE INSTALLED TIGHT TO DRYWALL AND CASEGOODS B. CENTER ALL FLOOR TRANSITIONS ON THE CL OF DOORS U.N.O. WALL BASE: A. ALL RUBBER BASE SHALL BE SEALED TIGHT TO FINISHED FLOOR MATERIAL. B. PROVIDE SCHEDULED BASE ALONG BOTTOM OF EXPOSED FRONTS, BACKS, SIDES, AND ENDS OF ALL FIXED CABINETS, PEDESTALS, VERTICAL SUPPORT PANELS, KNEE SPACES, ETC., U.N.O. ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. C. WHERE WALL CERAMIC TILE MEETS FLOOR, PROVIDE A WATER RESILIENT SLICONE CAULKING AT JOINT. WALL FINISH: A. WALL TEXTURE SHALL BE LEVEL 4H ROLLER FINISH, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. B. PAINTED ALL ELECTRICAL AND ACCESS WALL PANELS TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL COLOR. CEILING: A. REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR ALL CEILING HEIGHTS. B. PAINT ALL ACCESS PANELS IN CEILING TO MATCH ADJACENT CEILING COLOR. DOORS/WINDOWS: A. REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE FOR FINISH OF INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOOR & FRAME, AND INTERIOR SURFACE OF EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOOR & FRAME. MILLWORK: A. PULLS ARE SHOWN FOR LOCATION ONLY, SEE PROJECT MANUAL FOR HARDWARE STYLE AND TYPE. B. COUNTERTOPS, BASE AND UPPER CABNETS TO RECEIVE PLASTIC LANIMATE U.N.O. C. ALL KNEE SPACES ARE GREATER THAN 4'-0" REQUIRE AN ANGLE SUPPORT(S). COORDINATE FINAL INSTALLATION WITH UNDER COUNTER FILE CABINETS. D. ALL CABINET DOORS TO BE EQUAL SIZES WITH MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS AS SHOWN AND A MINIMUM OF 12" U.N.O. E. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND ADJUST CABINET DIMENSIONS ACCORDINGLY (FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS BEFORE BUILDING MILLWORK). F. FINISH ALL EXPOSED & SEMI-EXPOSED CABINET EDGES. G. ALL MILLWORK TO HAVE MELAMINE INTERIORS. H. PROVIDE DOOR BUMPER GUARDS AT ALL CABINETS DOORS & DRAWERS. I. LOCATE CABINET DOOR PULLS SO THAT SCREWS DO NOT DAMAGE MILLWORK AT INTERIOR CABINETS. J. COUNTERTOP AND SPLASH TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF PLYWOOD. K. INCLUDE LOCKS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. CONFIRM MILLWORK KEYING REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER. L. PROVIDE FULL LINE BORE FOR ADJUSTABLE SHELVES. M. ALL MILLWORK EDGE BANDING TO MATCH COLOR OF ADJACENT P LAM. GENERAL NOTES INTERIOR FINISH PLAN MILLWORK FINISH TAG FLOOR FINISH BASE FINISH WALL FINISH CEILING FINISH ROOM FINISH TAG NOT IN CONTRACT FLOORING FINISH PATTERN DIRECTION INTERIOR FINISH PLAN LEGEND XXXX CORNER GUARD, RE: FINISH LEGEND N.I.C. N.I.C. EXAM 12 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 119 STORAGE ACT PT21 RBC39 VT127 120EXAM 13 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 121 EXAM 14 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 122 EXAM 11 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 118 EXAM 10 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 117 EXAM 09 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 116 EXAM 08 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 115 IT/ELEC - PT21 RBC39 VT127 114 EXAM 07 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 113 EXAM 06 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 110 EXAM 03 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 106 EXAM 02 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 105EXAM 01 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 104 STAFF TLT PT10E PT29E, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 111 BREAKROOM ACT, PT21 PT21 RBC39 VT127 112 MA STATION ACT, PT28 PT28 RBC39 VT127 127 EXAM 05 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 109 EXAM 04 ACT PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 108 EXAM 15 ACT, PT21 PT21, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 123 NURSING ACT PT21 RBC39 VT127 124 WAITING ACT, PT28 PT21, PT28, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 100 LAB ACT, PT28 PT28 RBC39 VT127 128 RECEPTION ACT, PT28 PT21 RBC39 CT55 125 SHARED OFFICE ACT, PT21 PT21 RBC39 CT55 107 STORAGE ACT PT21 RBC39 VT127 130 VITALS ACT PT21 RBC39 VT127 103 TLT PT10E PT29E, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 132 TLT PT10E PT29E, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 129 OFFICE ACT PT21 RBC39 CT55 126 TLT PT10E PT29E, IRL6 RBC39 VT127 102 EVS - FRP1 RBC39 VT127 131 101 RISER ROOM CT55 VT127 CT 5 5 VT 1 2 7 PT 2 8 PT 2 8 PT 2 8 PT21 PT21 PT21 PT 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CG1 CG1 CG1 CG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 EG1EG1 CG1 EG1 CG1 CG1 CG1 CG1 CG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 CG1 EG1 CG1 CG3 EG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 CG1 CG1 CG1 CG1 CG1CG1 CG1 CG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 CG1 EG1 CG1 CG1 CG1 CG1 CG1 EG2 CG2 CG1CG1EG1EG1 CG2 CG2 CG2 PT21 CG1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2222222 2 LVT FLOORING AS SCHED.SCHLUTER SCHIENE, SATIN NICKEL ANODIZED ALUM. (AT) CARPET AS SCHED. UNDERLAYMENT TO BRING FLOORING FLUSH TO CARPET, JOHNSONITE SUBFLOOR LEVELER SYSTEM 1 NOTES BY NUMBER FINISH FLOOR PLAN WT5 TO BE APPLIED CONTINUOUSLY BETWEEN WALLS AND DOORS. ALIGN TOP OF WT5 WITH TOP OF DOOR FRAME. PROVIDE STENCIL PATTERN ABOVE, TYP. RE: WALL STENCIL DETAIL. VERIFY ALL STENCIL DETAIL LOCATIONS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO PAINTING. 2 REFER TO FINISH LEGEND FOR EXTENTS OF IRL6. 7'-2" LINE OF CEILING ABOVE 3" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 3" END OF WALLEND OF WALL 1' - 2 " 1 1 / 2 " 1 1 / 2 " 1 1 / 2 " PT37 PT157 PT37 WT5 PT28 PT21 PT28 SHEET NUMBER 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. NOT TO BE USED IN ANY CAPACITY FOR BIDDING, PERMITTING, OR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS: SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE: 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 A911 FINISH FLOOR PLAN & FINISH DETAILS PE R M I T S E T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S 12/19/2024 PLAN NORTH TRUE NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"1 FINISH FLOOR PLAN 3" = 1'-0"2 FLOORING TRANSITION - CARPET TO LVT FLOORING 1" = 1'-0"3 WALL STENCIL DETAIL NOTES BY SYMBOL: " " 1.REPLACE EXISTING 10-TON ROOFTOP UNIT WITH NEW PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNIT. UTILIZE EXISTING ROOF CURB AND ROOF OPENINGS. PROVIDE NEW ROOF CURB IF EXISTING CURB IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH NEW UNIT. 2.PROVIDE AS ALTERNATE PRICE: EXTEND SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCT TO ABOVE AREA NOT IN CONTRACT AND CAP FOR FUTURE TENANT. 3.ROUTE 6"Ø EXHAUST AIR DUCT UP THROUGH ROOF AND TERMINATE WITH ROOF CAP. INSTALL MINIMUM 10'-0" FROM ANY FRESH AIR INTAKE. 4.ROUTE 3 4" CONDENSATE DRAIN TO MOP SINK AND TERMINATE WITH AIR GAP. 5.ROUTE AND SIZE REFRIGERANT PIPING FROM OUTDOOR UNIT TO INDOOR UNIT PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS. 6.THERMOSTAT CONTROLLER FOR RTU-1, 2 & 3. 7.PROVIDE REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR. WIRE BACK TO THERMOSTAT CONTROLLER IN RECEPTION AREA. A.NOT ALL DUCTWORK, PIPING, AND ACCESSORIES ARE NECESSARILY SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING, BUT WHAT WAS DEEMED NECESSARY TO SHOW INTENT OF WORK INVOLVED IN THIS PROJECT. REFER TO ALL OTHER PLANS, SECTIONS, DETAILS, SCHEDULES AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMPLETE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS. B.COORDINATE ALL PENETRATIONS OF FLOOR, ROOF, WALLS, ETC. WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE/SMOKE RATED CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE SEALED WITH A FIRE RATED CAULK EQUAL TO OR EXCEEDING THE CONSTRUCTION FIRE RATING. C.FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS SHALL CONFORM TO UL181 IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 603.6 OF THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE. LENGTH OF FLEX DUCT SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 FT. D.ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED AS TO THE AREA(S) SERVED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 304.12 OF THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE. E.PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS OR OTHER MEANS OF APPROVED ACCESS TO ALL FIRE DAMPERS AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS. ACCESS DOORS SHALL BE LABELED ON THE ACCESS DOOR AND ON THE CEILING BELOW. F.PROVIDE AND INSTALL BALANCING DAMPER AT EACH BRANCH TAKE-OFF OF SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR SYSTEMS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL BALANCING DAMPER AT EACH BRANCH TAKE-OFF OF RETURN SYSTEMS WHERE INDICATED. G.MOUNT SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSORS, THERMOSTATS, OCCUPANCY SENSORS, AND REMOTE CONTROL DEVICES WITH CENTERLINE AT 46” AFF UNLESS OTHER WISE INDICATED. H.COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ROOF ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE OF ROOFTOP MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. I.COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 120V OUTLET WITHIN 25 FT. OF ALL ROOFTOP AND EXTERIOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. J.ALL FRESH AIR INTAKES AND EXHAUST OPENINGS SHALL HAVE 1/4" MESH BIRD SCREENS. K.PROVIDE BALANCING REPORT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE. SUBMIT TO THE ARCHITECT FOR FINAL APPROVAL. PROVIDE BALANCING REPORT TO INSPECTOR AT TIME OF HEATING FINAL INSPECTION. L.DUCTWORK SHALL BE SEALED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS AND THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE. M.ALL INTERIOR EXPOSED DUCT SHALL BE INTERNALLY LINED AND WITH PAINT GRIP FINISH. REFER TO ARCHITECT FOR FINAL FINISH OF DUCTWORK. N.COORDINATE REQUIREMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH RELOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT WITH OWNER PRIOR TO BID. GENERAL NOTES: 119 EXAM 12 120 STORAGE 121 EXAM 13 122 EXAM 14 118 EXAM 11 117 EXAM 10 116 EXAM 09 115 EXAM 08 114 IT/ELEC 113 EXAM 07 110 EXAM 06 106 EXAM 03 105 EXAM 02 104 EXAM 01 111 STAFF TLT 112 BREAKROOM 127 MA STATION 109 EXAM 05 108 EXAM 04 123 EXAM 15 124 NURSING 100 WAITING 128 LAB 125 RECEPTION 107 SHARED OFFICE 103 VITALS 132 TLT 129 TLT 126 OFFICE 130 STORAGE 102 TLT 131 EVS 101 RISER ROOM 20X14 12X14 18X14 12X14 10"Ø 38X16 20X14 18 X 1 2 10 X 1 0 18X14 10 X 1 0 32 X 1 8 32 X 1 6 32X16 32X18 30X16 14X12 18 X 1 4 26 X 1 4 14X12 22X1218X12 14X14 16X12 28 X 1 4 RTU-3 RTU-1 RTU-2 FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL1 REVISIONS: 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 PE R M I T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S TEXAS REGISTRATION # F-20374 V3 PROJECT #:24567.001 SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE 12/19/2024 M1.01 FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL 12/19/2024 REVISIONS: 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 PE R M I T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S TEXAS REGISTRATION # F-20374 V3 PROJECT #:24567.001 SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE 12/19/2024 M2.01 SCHEDULES & DETAILS - MECHANICAL 12/19/2024 AIR DEVICE CONNECTION DETAIL4 EXHAUST FAN DETAIL - CEILING MOUNT3 SHOULD BE CONTINUOUS UNDER UNIT. ROOF DECK AND ROOF INSULATION ROOF TOP UNIT DETAIL1 EQUIPMENT ROOF CURB CONDENSATE LINE WITHIN CURB (INSULATED) SEAL PENETRATION ROOFTOP HVAC UNIT SIDE OUTLET CONNECTION OPEN VENT CLEANOUT EPDM RUBBER BOOT ENCLOSURE. SECURE WITH STAINLESS STEEL HOSE CLAMPS. WITH ROOF CURB MANUFACTURER. THRU ROOF CURB. COORDINATE 3" LONG FACTORY WELDED SLEEVE PLUMBING FIXTURE/DRAIN. AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE TO ROUTE CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE CLEANOUT CAP (INSULATED) BELOW ROOF INSULATE CONDENSATE PIPING ROOF TOP HVAC UNIT CONDENSATE PIPING DETAIL2 REVISIONS: 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 PE R M I T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S TEXAS REGISTRATION # F-20374 V3 PROJECT #:24567.001 SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE 12/19/2024 M3.01 DETAILS - MECHANICAL 12/19/2024 PLUMBING NOTES BY SYMBOL: 1.CONNECT NEW DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD. CONNECT SANITARY TO NEAREST EXISTING PLUMBING UTILITIES IN THE AREA. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND SIZE PRIOR TO BID. GENERAL NOTES: A.CONTRACTOR TO VISIT SITE AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS, TO DETERMINE THE EXTENT OF WORK REQUIRED TO FACILITATE NEW CONSTRUCTION AND INCLUDE ALL SUCH WORK IN HIS/HER BID. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO UNDERFLOOR SANITARY LOCATIONS AND CIVIL CONNECTIONS). CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ALL DISCREPANCIES PRIOR ANY INSTALLATIONS. B.BUILDING SEWERS: BUILDING SEWERS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH CLEANOUTS LOCATED NOT MORE THAN 75'-0" APART MEASURED FROM THE UPSTREAM ENTRANCE OF THE CLEANOUT. C.CHANGES OF DIRECTION: CLEANOUTS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT EACH CHANGE OF DIRECTION OF THE BUILDING DRAIN HORIZONTAL WASTE OR SOIL LINES GREATER THAN 45 DEGREES. WHERE MORE THAN ONE CHANGE OF DIRECTION OCCURS IN A RUN OF A RUN OF PIPING, ONLY ONE CLEANOUT SHALL BE REQUIRED FOR EACH 40'-0" FEET OF DEVELOPED LENGTH OF THE DRAINAGE PIPING. ALL SEWER PIPING SHOWN ON THIS PLAN IS UNDERFLOOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. D.CONCEALED PIPING: CLEANOUTS ON CONCEALED PIPING OR PIPING UNDER A FLOOR SLAB OR IN A CRAWL SPACE OF LESS THAN 24 INCHES IN HEIGHT OR A PLENUM SHALL BE EXTENDED THROUGH AND TERMINATE FLUSH WITH THE FINISHED WALL, FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACE OR SHALL BE EXTENDED TO THE OUTSIDE OF THE BUILDING. CLEANOUT PLUGS SHALL NOT BE COVERED WITH CEMENT, PLASTER OR ANY OTHER PERMANENT FINISH MATERIAL. WHERE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONCEAL A CLEANOUT OR TERMINATE A CLEANOUT IN AN AREA SUBJECT TO VEHICULAR TRAFFIC, COVER PLATE, ACCESS DOOR OR CLEANOUT SHALL BE OF AN APPROVED TYPE DESIGNED AND INSTALLED FOR THIS PURPOSE. E.VERIFY MAXIMUM PRESSURE IS NOT IN EXCESS OF 55PSI. IF IT IS, PROVIDE AND INSTALL PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES ON THE NEW LINES TO PROVIDE A MAXIMUM PRESSURE OF 55 PSI TO THE NEW FIXTURES OR TO EXISTING FIXTURES BEING REWORKED. F.ALL WASTE PIPE 212" AND SMALLER SHALL HAVE A SLOPE OF NOT LESS THAN 1/4" PER FOOT; ALL WASTE PIPE 3" AND LARGER SHALL HAVE NOT LESS THAN 1/8" PER FOOT SLOPE. G.ALL PLUMBING PIPE, FIXTURES AND FITTINGS SHALL BE LEAD FREE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "REDUCTION OF LEAD IN DRINKING WATER ACT" EFFECTIVE JANUARY 4, 2014. H.REFER TO EQUIPMENT VENDOR/OWNER/ARCHITECT FOR EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES BREAKROOM(S). IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH THE EQUIPMENT VENDOR/OWNER/ARCHITECT TO PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY ITEMS FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. ALL EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED IN THE MEP DRAWINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE PLUMBING SUB-CONTRACTOR. ALL EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED IN THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT VENDOR/OWNER/ARCHITECT. I.ALL SHUT-OFF VALVES TO BE INSTALLED AND TO BE ACCESSIBLE WITHOUT THE USE OF A LADDER. J.ALL WATER AND DRAIN LINES TO AND FROM EQUIPMENT SHALL BE COPPER WITH A MINIMUM OF 6 INCHES ABOVE FINISH FLOOR FOR CLEANING PURPOSES. K.ALL DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER CONNECTION SIZES AND ROUGH-IN LOCATIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. L.PROVIDE AHJ APPROVED BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE PRIOR TO ALL APPLIANCE AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO DOMESTIC COLD WATER SYSTEM. REFER TO PLUMBING BACKFLOW SCHEDULE. M.NO PVC SHALL BE INSTALLED IN THE RETURN AIR PLENUM SPACE. X N.I.C. N.I.C. 119 EXAM 12 120 STORAGE 121 EXAM 13 122 EXAM 14 118 EXAM 11 117 EXAM 10 116 EXAM 09 115 EXAM 08 114 IT/ELEC 113 EXAM 07 110 EXAM 06 106 EXAM 03 105 EXAM 02 104 EXAM 01 111 STAFF TLT 112 BREAKROOM 127 MA STATION 109 EXAM 05 108 EXAM 04 123 EXAM 15 124 NURSING 100 WAITING 128 LAB 125 RECEPTION 107 SHARED OFFICE 103 VITALS 132 TLT 129 TLT 126 OFFICE 130 STORAGE 102 TLT 131 EVS 101 RISER ROOM 3"FD WH-1 MS-1 CP-1 3"FD 3"FD 3"FD 3"FD 2" VTR 2" VTR 3" VTR 11 2" 112" 112" 11 2" 3 4" 11 4" 3 4" 112" 112" 11 2" 11 4" 1"1" 1" 11 4" 11 4"3 4" SK1 SK1 L-2 L-2 L-2 L-2 W-2 W-2 W-2 W-2 SK1 SK1 SK1 SK1 SK1 EWC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCALE: FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING 1/4" = 1'-0"1 REVISIONS: 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 PE R M I T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S TEXAS REGISTRATION # F-20374 V3 PROJECT #:24567.001 SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE 12/19/2024 P1.01 FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING 12/19/2024 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAM1PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAM2PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAM 3 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAM4 FLOOR 3.5" HOUSEKEEPING PAD (TYPICAL) CIRCULATING PUMP HOT WATER RETURN D SHUT-OFF VALVE (TYP) CHECK VALVE (TYP) THERMAL EXPANSION TANK EQUAL PROVIDE PLATFORM TO ALLOW DRAIN LINE FROM PAN TO SLOPE TO WASTE RECEPTOR. RUN FULL SIZE DRAIN LINE TO MOP SINK AND TURN DOWN. PRESSURE & TEMP. RELIEF VALVE 3 4" DRAIN TO NEAREST FLOOR DRAIN WATER HEATER DETAIL5 1 REVISIONS: 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 PE R M I T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S TEXAS REGISTRATION # F-20374 V3 PROJECT #:24567.001 SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE 12/19/2024 P2.01 SCHEDULES & DETAILS - PLUMBING ADDENDUM 1 02/17/2025 02/17/2025 WATER HEATER SCHEDULE THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE SCHEDULE PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULEDOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMP SCHEDULE INTERIOR DRAIN SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT BACKFLOW PREVENTER SCHEDULE ADDITIONAL PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE MINIMUM PIPE CONNECTION SCHEDULE BACK OF HOUSE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE REVISIONS: 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 PE R M I T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S TEXAS REGISTRATION # F-20374 V3 PROJECT #:24567.001 SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE 12/19/2024 P2.02 SCHEDULES & DETAILS - PLUMBING 12/19/2024 12/19/2024 119 EXAM 12 120 STORAGE 121 EXAM 13 122 EXAM 14 118 EXAM 11 117 EXAM 10 116 EXAM 09 115 EXAM 08 114 IT/ELEC 113 EXAM 07 110 EXAM 06 106 EXAM 03 105 EXAM 02 104 EXAM 01 111 STAFF TLT 112 BREAKROOM 127 MA STATION 109 EXAM 05 108 EXAM 04 123 EXAM 15 124 NURSING 100 WAITING 128 LAB 125 RECEPTION 107 SHARED OFFICE 103 VITALS 132 TLT 129 TLT 126 OFFICE 130 STORAGE 102 TLT 131 EVS 101 RISER ROOM WH-1 CP-1 NOTES BY SYMBOL: GENERAL NOTES: FLOOR PLAN - POWER1 REVISIONS: 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 PE R M I T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S TEXAS REGISTRATION # F-20374 V3 PROJECT #:24567.001 SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE 12/19/2024 E1.02 FLOOR PLAN - POWER 12/19/2024 12/19/2024 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING DETAIL1 ARRANGEMENT FOR NOISE CONTROL BACK TO BACK ELECTRICAL BOX 2 REVISIONS: 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 PE R M I T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S TEXAS REGISTRATION # F-20374 V3 PROJECT #:24567.001 SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE 12/19/2024 PLUG LOAD CONTROL DETAIL3 E3.01 SCHEDULES & DETAILS - ELECTRICAL PARTIAL RISER DIAGRAM4 NOTES BY SYMBOL: 12/19/2024 S F REVISIONS: 4040 N CENTRAL EXPY, SUITE 720 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 t 314.302.6864 www.modusarchitecture.com 16 2 5 L A N C A S T E R D R I V E GR A P E V I N E , T E X A S 7 6 0 5 1 PE R M I T CO O K C H I L D R E N ' S TEXAS REGISTRATION # F-20374 V3 PROJECT #:24567.001 SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME ISSUE DATE 12/19/2024 MEP GENERAL NOTES & SYMBOLS - MEP 12/19/2024 WOOD TRUSS REINFORCING SCHEDULE MARK CHORD REINFORCEMENT WEB REINFORCEMENT "A""B"WEB SIZE DIRECTION RIGHTLEFTTOP CHORD BOTT. CHORD "C""D" NOTES 1. REMOVE AND REINSTALL ALL BRIDGING LINES AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AS NEEDED TO REINFORCE JOIST. 2. WEB QUANTITY AND CONFIGURATION SHOWN IS GENERIC AND DOES NOT REFLECT ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS. 3. FASTENERS SHOWN ARE MINIMUM REQUIRED. LEFT END RIGHT END TOP CHORD REINFORCING REF. SCHEDULE BOTT. CHORD REINFORCING REF. SCHEDULE 4'-0"16'-0"2x4 RTU2x4 2x4 8'-0" 8'-0" RT-1 DIAGONAL WEB REINFORCING DIAGONAL WEB REINFORCING REF. SCHEDULE BA C D 119249 JULIE M. BOLDING salasobrien.com Registration: PROJECT STATUS: ISSUE DATE: SKETCH NUMBER: Dallas 12655 North Central Expy, Suite 720 Dallas, TX 75243 F-4111 07/18/2025 SKS-1 TRUSS REINFORCING DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULE COOK CHILDREN'S GRAPEVINE 1625 LANCASTER DRIVE GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 07/18/2025 3/4" = 1'-0"SKS-1 1 TRUSS REINFORCING DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULE A A CHORD REINF. EACH SIDE REF. DTL FOR SCHEDULE CHORD REINF. EACH SIDE REF. DTL FOR SCHEDULE NOTES 1. WEB REINFORCING OMITTED FOR CLARITY. 2. IF CHORD CONFIGURATION VARIES FROM WHAT IS SHOWN NOTIFY ENGINEER PRIOR TO REINFORCING JOISTS. EXIST. BOTTOM CHORD EXIST. TOP CHORD SECTION "A" NOTE 1. SPLICE TOP CHORD REINFORCING PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. TYPICAL SPLICE DETAIL 1/SKS-1 1/SKS-1 2x REINFORCING W/10d NAILS @ 8" O.C. STAGGERED EXISTING WOOD TRUSS NOTES 1. CHORD REINFORCING OMITTED FOR CLARITY. 2. IF WEB CONFIGURATION VARIES FROM WHAT IS SHOWN NOTIFY ENGINEER PRIOR TO REINFORCING JOISTS. SECTION "A" EXISTING WOOD TRUSS2x REINFORCING W/10d NAILS @8" O.C. STAGGERED 119249 JULIE M. BOLDING salasobrien.com Registration: PROJECT STATUS: ISSUE DATE: SKETCH NUMBER: Dallas 12655 North Central Expy, Suite 720 Dallas, TX 75243 F-4111 07/18/2025 SKS-2 TRUSS CHORD & WEB REINFORCING COOK CHILDREN'S GRAPEVINE 1625 LANCASTER DRIVE GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 07/18/20253/4" = 1'-0"SKS-2 2 TRUSS WEB REINFORCING 3/4" = 1'-0"SKS-2 1 TRUSS CHORD REINFORCING 2 - SIMPSON HGA10 EA. SIDE OF TRUSS PROVIDE 2x10 BLOCKING EA. SIDE OF TRUSS W/ 2 ROWS 16d NAILS @ 6" O.C. ATTACHED TO TOP CHORD & WEB 2 ROWS 16d NAILS @ 6" O.C. (DECK TO BLOCKING) PROVIDED 2 - 2x12 FLATWISE BLOCKING BETWEEN TRUSSES @ POST ATTACHMENT LOCATIONS RTU RACK DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION BY OTHERS ROOF TRUSS, TYP. 119249 JULIE M. BOLDING salasobrien.com Registration: PROJECT STATUS: ISSUE DATE: SKETCH NUMBER: Dallas 12655 North Central Expy, Suite 720 Dallas, TX 75243 F-4111 07/18/2025 SKS-3 ROOF TOP A/C RACK CONNX COOK CHILDREN'S GRAPEVINE 1625 LANCASTER DRIVE GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 07/18/2025 3/4" = 1'-0"SKS-3 1 ROOF TOP A/C RACK CONNX